The Principle of Relativity Albert Einstein and H. Minkowski 1222 downloads.pdf

The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Principle of Relativity
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.

Title: The Principle of Relativity

Author: Albert Einstein
H. Minkowski

Author of introduction, etc.: P. C. Mahalanobis

Translator: Satyendranath Bose
Meghnad Saha

Release date: December 14, 2021 [eBook #66944]
Most recently updated: October 18, 2024

Language: English

Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/66944

Credits: Richard Tonsing, David King, and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net. (This file was
produced from images generously made available by The
Internet Archive.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPLE
OF RELATIVITY ***

The Principle of Relativity

THE PRINCIPLE OF RELATIVITY
ORIGINAL PAPERS BY

A. EINSTEIN AND H. MINKOWSKI
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH BY

M. N. SAHA AND S. N. BOSE
LECTURERS ON PHYSICS AND APPLIED MATHEMATICS
University College of Science, Calcutta University

WITH A HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION BY

P. C. MAHALANOBIS
PROFESSOR OF PHYSICS, PRESIDENCY COLLEGE, CALCU.

PUBLISHED BY THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALCUTTA
1920

Sole Agents
R. CAMBRAY & CO.

PRINTED BY ATULCHANDRA BHATTACHARYYA,

AT THE CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY PRESS, SENATE HOUSE,
CALCUTTA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Historical Introduction i-xxiii
[By Mr. P. C. Mahalanobis.]
2. On the Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies 1-34
[Einstein’s first paper on the restricted Theory of Relativity, originally
published in the Annalen der Physik in 1905. Translated from the original
German by Dr. Meghnad Saha.]
3. Albrecht Einstein 35-39
[A short biographical note by Dr. Meghnad Saha.]
4. Principle of Relativity 1-52
[H. Minkowski’s original paper on the restricted Principle of Relativity first
published in 1909. Translated from the original German by Dr. Meghnad
Saha.]
5. Appendix to the above by H. Minkowski 53-88
[Translated by Dr. Meghnad Saha.]
6. The Generalised Principle of Relativity 89-163
[A. Einstein’s second paper on the Generalised Principle first published in
1916. Translated from the original German by Mr. Satyendranath Bose.]
7. Notes 165-185

Transcriber’s Note:

This ebook includes complex mathematical formulas. Some are simple in-
line expressions like k = 1 - 1/μ2. They may include special notations such
as [=a] for an 'a' with a bar across the top, [.a] for an 'a' with a dot over it,

[..a] for an 'a' with two dots over it. Others are more complex “ASCII Art”
like this:

l l 2lc 2l
t₁ = ------- + ---------- = ----------- = --- β²
c-u c+u c² - u² c

HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION

Lord Kelvin writing in 1893, in his preface to the English edition of Hertz’s
Researches on Electric Waves, says “many workers and many thinkers have
helped to build up the nineteenth century school of plenum, one ether for
light, heat, electricity, magnetism; and the German and English volumes
containing Hertz’s electrical papers, given to the world in the last decade of
the century, will be a permanent monument of the splendid consummation
now realised.”
Ten years later, in 1905, we find Einstein declaring that “the ether will be
proved to be superfluous.” At first sight the revolution in scientific thought
brought about in the course of a single decade appears to be almost too
violent. A more careful even though a rapid review of the subject will,
however, show how the Theory of Relativity gradually became a historical
necessity.
Towards the beginning of the nineteenth century, the luminiferous ether
came into prominence as a result of the brilliant successes of the wave
theory in the hands of Young and Fresnel. In its stationary aspect the elastic
solid ether was the outcome of the search for a medium in which the light
waves may “undulate.” This stationary ether, as shown by Young, also
afforded a satisfactory explanation of astronomical aberration. But its very
success gave rise to a host of new questions all bearing on the central
problem of relative motion of ether and matter.
Arago’s prism experiment.—The refractive index of a glass prism depends
on the incident velocity of light outside the prism and its velocity inside the
prism after refraction. On Fresnel’s fixed ether hypothesis, the incident light
waves are situated in the stationary ether outside the prism and move with
velocity c with respect to the ether. If the prism moves with a velocity u
with respect to this fixed ether, then the incident velocity of light with
respect to the prism should be c + u. Thus the refractive index of the glass

prism should depend on u the absolute velocity of the prism, i.e., its
velocity with respect to the fixed ether. Arago performed the experiment in
1819, but failed to detect the expected change.
Airy-Boscovitch water-telescope experiment.—Boscovitch had still earlier
in 1766, raised the very important question of the dependence of aberration
on the refractive index of the medium filling the telescope. Aberration
depends on the difference in the velocity of light outside the telescope and
its velocity inside the telescope. If the latter velocity changes owing to a
change in the medium filling the telescope, aberration itself should change,
that is, aberration should depend on the nature of the medium.
Airy, in 1871 filled up a telescope with water—but failed to detect any
change in the aberration. Thus we get both in the case of Arago prism
experiment and Airy-Boscovitch water-telescope experiment, the very
startling result that optical effects in a moving medium seem to be quite
independent of the velocity of the medium with respect to Fresnel’s
stationary ether.
Fresnel’s convection coefficient k = 1 - 1/μ2.—Possibly some form of
compensation is taking place. Working on this hypothesis, Fresnel offered
his famous ether convection theory. According to Fresnel, the presence of
matter implies a definite condensation of ether within the region occupied
by matter. This “condensed” or excess portion of ether is supposed to be
carried away with its own piece of moving matter. It should be observed
that only the “excess” portion is carried away, while the rest remains as
stagnant as ever. A complete convection of the “excess” ether ρ′ with the
full velocity u is optically equivalent to a partial convection of the total
ether ρ, with only a fraction of the velocity k. u. Fresnel showed that if this
convection coefficient k is 1 - 1/μ2 (μ being the refractive index of the
prism), then the velocity of light after refraction within the moving prism
would be altered to just such extent as would make the refractive index of
the moving prism quite independent of its “absolute” velocity u. The non-
dependence of aberration on the “absolute” velocity u, is also very easily
explained with the help of this Fresnelian convection-coefficient k.
Stokes’ viscous ether.—It should be remembered, however, that Fresnel’s
stationary ether is absolutely fixed and is not at all disturbed by the motion
of matter through it. In this respect Fresnelian ether cannot be said to

behave in any respectable physical fashion, and this led Stokes, in 1845-46,
to construct a more material type of medium. Stokes assumed that viscous
motion ensues near the surface of separation of ether and moving matter,
while at sufficiently distant regions the ether remains wholly undisturbed.
He showed how such a viscous ether would explain aberration if all motion
in it were differentially irrotational. But in order to explain the null Arago
effect, Stokes was compelled to assume the convection hypothesis of
Fresnel with an identical numerical value for k, namely 1 - 1/μ2. Thus the
prestige of the Fresnelian convection-coefficient was enhanced, if anything,
by the theoretical investigations of Stokes.
Fizeau’s experiment.—Soon after, in 1851, it received direct experimental
confirmation in a brilliant piece of work by Fizeau.
If a divided beam of light is re-united after passing through two adjacent
cylinders filled with water, ordinary interference fringes will be produced.
If the water in one of the cylinders is now made to flow, the “condensed”
ether within the flowing water would be convected and would produce a
shift in the interference fringes. The shift actually observed agreed very
well with a value of k = 1 - 1/μ2. The Fresnelian convection-coefficient now
became firmly established as a consequence of a direct positive effect. On
the other hand, the negative evidences in favour of the convection-
coefficient had also multiplied. Mascart, Hoek, Maxwell and others sought
for definite changes in different optical effects induced by the motion of the
earth relative to the stationary ether. But all such attempts failed to reveal
the slightest trace of any optical disturbance due to the “absolute” velocity
of the earth, thus proving conclusively that all the different optical effects
shared in the general compensation arising out of the Fresnelian convection
of the excess ether. It must be carefully noted that the Fresnelian
convection-coefficient implicitly assumes the existence of a fixed ether
(Fresnel) or at least a wholly stagnant medium at sufficiently distant regions
(Stokes), with reference to which alone a convection velocity can have any
significance. Thus the convection-coefficient implying some type of a
stationary or viscous, yet nevertheless “absolute” ether, succeeded in
explaining satisfactorily all known optical facts down to 1880.
Michelson-Morley Experiment.—In 1881, Michelson and Morley
performed their classical experiments which undermined the whole
structure of the old ether theory and thus served to introduce the new theory

of relativity. The fundamental idea underlying this experiment is quite
simple. In all old experiments the velocity of light situated in free ether was
compared with the velocity of waves actually situated in a piece of moving
matter and presumably carried away by it. The compensatory effect of the
Fresnelian convection of ether afforded a satisfactory explanation of all
negative results.
In the Michelson-Morley experiment the arrangement is quite different. If
there is a definite gap in a rigid body, light waves situated in free ether will
take a definite time in crossing the gap. If the rigid platform carrying the
gap is set in motion with respect to the ether in the direction of light
propagation, light waves (which are even now situated in free ether) should
presumably take a longer time to cross the gap.
We cannot do better than quote Eddington’s description of this famous
experiment. “The principle of the experiment may be illustrated by
considering a swimmer in a river. It is easily realized that it takes longer to
swim to a point 50 yards up-stream and back than to a point 50 yards
across-stream and back. If the earth is moving through the ether there is a
river of ether flowing through the laboratory, and a wave of light may be
compared to a swimmer travelling with constant velocity relative to the
current. If, then, we divide a beam of light into two parts, and send one-half
swimming up the stream for a certain distance and then (by a mirror) back
to the starting point, and send the other half an equal distance across stream
and back, the across-stream beam should arrive back first.

Let the ether be flowing relative to the apparatus with velocity u in the
direction Ox, and let OA, OB, be the two arms of the apparatus of equal
length l, OA being placed up-stream. Let c be the velocity of light. The time
for the double journey along OA and back is

where

a factor greater than unity.
For the transverse journey the light must have a component velocity n up-
stream (relative to the ether) in order to avoid being carried below OB: and
since its total velocity is c, its component across-stream must be √(c² - u²),
the time for the double journey OB is accordingly

so that t₁ > t₂.
But when the experiment was tried, it was found that both parts of the beam
took the same time, as tested by the interference bands produced.”
After a most careful series of observations, Michelson and Morley failed to
detect the slightest trace of any effect due to earth’s motion through ether.
The Michelson-Morley experiment seems to show that there is no relative
motion of ether and matter. Fresnel’s stagnant ether requires a relative
velocity of—u. Thus Michelson and Morley themselves thought at first that
their experiment confirmed Stokes’ viscous ether, in which no relative
motion can ensue on account of the absence of slipping of ether at the
surface of separation. But even on Stokes’ theory this viscous flow of ether
would fall off at a very rapid rate as we recede from the surface of
separation. Michelson and Morley repeated their experiment at different

heights from the surface of the earth, but invariably obtained the same
negative results, thus failing to confirm Stokes’ theory of viscous flow.
Lodge’s experiment.—Further, in 1893, Lodge performed his rotating
sphere experiment which showed complete absence of any viscous flow of
ether due to moving masses of matter. A divided beam of light, after
repeated reflections within a very narrow gap between two massive
hemispheres, was allowed to re-unite and thus produce interference bands.
When the two hemispheres are set rotating, it is conceivable that the ether
in the gap would be disturbed due to viscous flow, and any such flow would
be immediately detected by a disturbance of the interference bands. But
actual observation failed to detect the slightest disturbance of the ether in
the gap, due to the motion of the hemispheres. Lodge’s experiment thus
seems to show a complete absence of any viscous flow of ether.
Apart from these experimental discrepancies, grave theoretical objections
were urged against a viscous ether. Stokes himself had shown that his ether
must be incompressible and all motion in it differentially irrotational, at the
same time there should be absolutely no slipping at the surface of
separation. Now all these conditions cannot be simultaneously satisfied for
any conceivable material medium without certain very special and arbitrary
assumptions. Thus Stokes’ ether failed to satisfy the very motive which had
led Stokes to formulate it, namely, the desirability of constructing a
“physical” medium. Planck offered modified forms of Stokes’ theory which
seemed capable of being reconciled with the Michelson-Morley experiment,
but required very special assumptions. The very complexity and the very
arbitrariness of these assumptions prevented Planck’s ether from attaining
any degree of practical importance in the further development of the
subject.
The sole criterion of the value of any scientific theory must ultimately be its
capacity for offering a simple, unified, coherent and fruitful description of
observed facts. In proportion as a theory becomes complex it loses in
usefulness—a theory which is obliged to requisition a whole array of
arbitrary assumptions in order to explain special facts is practically worse
than useless, as it serves to disjoin, rather than to unite, the several groups
of facts. The optical experiments of the last quarter of the nineteenth
century showed the impossibility of constructing a simple ether theory,
which would be amenable to analytic treatment and would at the same time

stimulate further progress. It should be observed that it could scarcely be
shown that no logically consistent ether theory was possible; indeed in
1910, H. A. Wilson offered a consistent ether theory which was at least
quite neutral with respect to all available optical data. But Wilson’s ether is
almost wholly negative—its only virtue being that it does not directly
contradict observed facts. Neither any direct confirmation nor a direct
refutation is possible and it does not throw any light on the various optical
phenomena. A theory like this being practically useless stands self-
condemned.
We must now consider the problem of relative motion of ether and matter
from the point of view of electrical theory. From 1860 the identity of light
as an electromagnetic vector became gradually established as a result of the
brilliant “displacement current” hypothesis of Clerk Maxwell and his
further analytical investigations. The elastic solid ether became gradually
transformed into the electromagnetic one. Maxwell succeeded in giving a
fairly satisfactory account of all ordinary optical phenomena and little room
was left for any serious doubts as regards the general validity of Maxwell’s
theory. Hertz’s researches on electric waves, first carried out in 1886,
succeeded in furnishing a strong experimental confirmation of Maxwell’s
theory. Electric waves behaved generally like light waves of very large
wave length.
The orthodox Maxwellian view located the dielectric polarisation in the
electromagnetic ether which was merely a transformation of Fresnel’s
stagnant ether. The magnetic polarisation was looked upon as wholly
secondary in origin, being due to the relative motion of the dielectric tubes
of polarisation. On this view the Fresnelian convection coefficient comes
out to be ½, as shown by J. J. Thomson in 1880, instead of 1 - (1/μ²) as
required by optical experiments. This obviously implies a complete failure
to account for all those optical experiments which depend for their
satisfactory explanation on the assumption of a value for the convection
coefficient equal to 1 - (1/μ²).
The modifications proposed independently by Hertz and Heaviside fare no
better.[1] They postulated the actual medium to be the seat of all electric
polarisation and further emphasised the reciprocal relation subsisting
between electricity and magnetism, thus making the field equations more
symmetrical. On this view the whole of the polarised ether is carried away

by the moving medium, and consequently, the convection coefficient
naturally becomes unity in this theory, a value quite as discrepant as that
obtained on the original Maxwellian assumption.
Thus neither Maxwell’s original theory nor its subsequent modifications as
developed by Hertz and Heaviside succeeded in obtaining a value for
Fresnelian coefficient equal to 1 - (1/μ2), and consequently stood totally
condemned from the optical point of view.
Certain direct electromagnetic experiments involving relative motion of
polarised dielectrics were no less conclusive against the generalised theory
of Hertz and Heaviside. According to Hertz a moving dielectric would carry
away the whole of its electric displacement with it. Hence the
electromagnetic effect near the moving dielectric would be proportional to
the total electric displacement, that is to K, the specific inductive capacity
of the dielectric. In 1901, Blondlot working with a stream of moving gas
could not detect any such effect. H. A. Wilson repeated the experiment in an
improved form in 1903 and working with ebonite found that the observed
effect was proportional to K - 1 instead of to K. For gases K is nearly equal
to 1 and hence practically no effect will be observed in their case. This
gives a satisfactory explanation of Blondlot’s negative results.
Rowland had shown in 1876 that the magnetic force due to a rotating
condenser (the dielectric remaining stationary) was proportional to K, the
sp. ind. cap. On the other hand, Röntgen found in 1888 the magnetic effect
due to a rotating dielectric (the condenser remaining stationary) to be
proportional to K - 1, and not to K. Finally Eichenwald in 1903 found that
when both condenser and dielectric are rotated together, the effect observed
was quite independent of K, a result quite consistent with the two previous
experiments. The Rowland effect proportional to K, together with the
opposite Röntgen effect proportional to 1 - K, makes the Eichenwald effect
independent of K.
All these experiments together with those of Blondlot and Wilson made it
clear that the electromagnetic effect due to a moving dielectric was
proportional to K - 1, and not to K as required by Hertz’s theory. Thus the
above group of experiments with moving dielectrics directly contradicted
the Hertz-Heaviside theory. The internal discrepancies inherent in the
classic ether theory had now become too prominent. It was clear that the

ether concept had finally outgrown its usefulness. The observed facts had
become too contradictory and too heterogeneous to be reduced to an
organised whole with the help of the ether concept alone. Radical
departures from the classical theory had become absolutely necessary.
There were several outstanding difficulties in connection with anomalous
dispersion, selective reflection and selective absorption which could not be
satisfactory explained in the classic electromagnetic theory. It was evident
that the assumption of some kind of discreteness in the optical medium had
become inevitable. Such an assumption naturally gave rise to an atomic
theory of electricity, namely, the modern electron theory. Lorentz had
postulated the existence of electrons so early as 1878, but it was not until
some years later that the electron theory became firmly established on a
satisfactory basis.
Lorentz assumed that a moving dielectric merely carried away its own
“polarisation doublets,” which on his theory gave rise to the induced field
proportional to K - 1. The field near a moving dielectric is naturally
proportional to K - 1 and not to K. Lorentz’s theory thus gave a satisfactory
explanation of all those experiments with moving dielectrics which required
effects proportional to K - 1. Lorentz further succeeded in obtaining a value
for the Fresnelian convection coefficient equal to 1 - 1/μ2, the exact value
required by all optical experiments of the moving type.
We must now go back to Michelson and Morley’s experiment. We have
seen that both parts of the beam are situated in free ether; no material
medium is involved in any portion of the paths actually traversed by the
beam. Consequently no compensation due to Fresnelian convection of ether
by moving medium is possible. Thus Fresnelian convection compensation
can have no possible application in this case. Yet some marvellous
compensation has evidently taken place which has completely masked the
“absolute” velocity of the earth.
In Michelson and Morley’s experiment, the distance travelled by the beam
along OA (that is, in a direction parallel to the motion of the platform) is
2lβ², while the distance travelled by the beam along OB, perpendicular to
the direction of motion of the platform, is 2lβ. Yet the most careful
experiments showed, as Eddington says, “that both parts of the beam took
the same time as tested by the interference bands produced. It would seem

that OA and OB could not really have been of the same length; and if OB
was of length l, OA must have been of length l/β. The apparatus was now
rotated through 90°, so that OB became the up-stream. The time for the two
journeys was again the same, so that 0B must now be the shorter length.
The plain meaning of the experiment is that both arms have a length l when
placed along Oy (perpendicular to the direction of motion), and
automatically contract to a length l/β, when placed along Ox (parallel to the
direction of motion). This explanation was first given by Fitz-Gerald.”
This Fitz-Gerald contraction, startling enough in itself, does not suffice.
Assuming this contraction to be a real one, the distance travelled with
respect to the ether is 2lβ and the time taken for this journey is 2lβ/c. But
the distance travelled with respect to the platform is always 2l. Hence the
velocity of light with respect to the platform is

a variable quantity depending on the “absolute” velocity of the platform.
But no trace of such an effect has ever been found. The velocity of light is
always found to be quite independent of the velocity of the platform. The
present difficulty cannot be solved by any further alteration in the measure
of space. The only recourse left open is to alter the measure of time as well,
that is, to adopt the concept of “local time.” If a moving clock goes slower
so that one ‘real’ second becomes 1/β second as measured in the moving
system, the velocity of light relative to the platform will always remain c.
We must adopt two very startling hypotheses, namely, the Fitz-Gerald
contraction and the concept of “local time,” in order to give a satisfactory
explanation of the Michelson-Morley experiment.
These results were already reached by Lorentz in the course of further
developments of his electron theory. Lorentz used a special set of
transformation equations[2] for time which implicitly introduced the concept
of local time. But he himself failed to attach any special significance to it,
and looked upon it rather as a mere mathematical artifice like imaginary
quantities in analysis or the circle at infinity in projective geometry. The
originality of Einstein at this stage consists in his successful physical

interpretation of these results, and viewing them as the coherent organised
consequences of a single general principle. Lorentz established the
Relativity Theorem[3] (consisting merely of a set of transformation
equations) while Einstein generalised it into a Universal Principle. In
addition Einstein introduced fundamentally new concepts of space and
time, which served to destroy old fetishes and demanded a wholesale
revision of scientific concepts and thus opened up new possibilities in the
synthetic unification of natural processes.
Newton had framed his laws of motion in such a way as to make them quite
independent of the absolute velocity of the earth. Uniform relative motion
of ether and matter could not be detected with the help of dynamical laws.
According to Einstein neither could it be detected with the help of optical or
electromagnetic experiments. Thus the Einsteinian Principle of Relativity
asserts that all physical laws are independent of the ‘absolute’ velocity of an
observer.
For different systems, the form of all physical laws is conserved. If we
chose the velocity of light[4] to be the fundamental unit of measurement for
all observers (that is, assume the constancy of the velocity of light in all
systems) we can establish a metric “one-one” correspondence between any
two observed systems, such correspondence depending only the relative
velocity of the two systems. Einstein’s Relativity is thus merely the
consistent logical application of the well known physical principle that we
can know nothing but relative motion. In this sense it is a further extension
of Newtonian Relativity.
On this interpretation, the Lorentz-Fitzgerald contraction and “local time”
lose their arbitrary character. Space and time as measured by two different
observers are naturally diverse, and the difference depends only on their
relative motion. Both are equally valid; they are merely different
descriptions of the same physical reality. This is essentially the point of
view adopted by Minkowski. He considers time itself to be one of the co-
ordinate axes, and in his four-dimensional world, that is in the space-time
reality, relative motion is reduced to a rotation of the axes of reference.
Thus, the diversity in the measurement of lengths and temporal rates is
merely due to the static difference in the “frame-work” of the different
observers.

The above theory of Relativity absorbed practically the whole of the
electromagnetic theory based on the Maxwell-Lorentz system of field
equations. It combined all the advantages of classic Maxwellian theory
together with an electronic hypothesis. The Lorentz assumption of
polarisation doublets had furnished a satisfactory explanation of the
Fresnelian convection of ether, but in the new theory this is deduced merely
as a consequence of the altered concept of relative velocity. In addition, the
theory of Relativity accepted the results of Michelson and Morley’s
experiments as a definite principle, namely, the principle of the constancy
of the velocity of light, so that there was nothing left for explanation in the
Michelson-Morley experiment. But even more than all this, it established a
single general principle which served to connect together in a simple
coherent and fruitful manner the known facts of Physics.
The theory of Relativity received direct experimental confirmation in
several directions. Repeated attempts were made to detect the Lorentz-
Fitzgerald contraction. Any ordinary physical contraction will usually have
observable physical results; for example, the total electrical resistance of a
conductor will diminish. Trouton and Noble, Trouton and Rankine,
Rayleigh and Brace, and others employed a variety of different methods to
detect the Lorentz-Fitzgerald contraction, but invariably with the same
negative results. Whether there is an ether or not, uniform velocity with
respect to it can never be detected. This does not prove that there is no such
thing as an ether but certainly does render the ether entirely superfluous.
Universal compensation is due to a change in local units of length and time,
or rather, being merely different descriptions of the same reality, there is no
compensation at all.
There was another group of observed phenomena which could scarcely be
fitted into a Newtonian scheme of dynamics without doing violence to it.
The experimental work of Kaufmann, in 1901, made it abundantly clear that
the “mass” of an electron depended on its velocity. So early as 1881, J. J.
Thomson had shown that the inertia of a charged particle increased with its
velocity. Abraham now deduced a formula for the variation of mass with
velocity, on the hypothesis that an electron always remained a rigid sphere.
Lorentz proceeded on the assumption that the electron shared in the
Lorentz-Fitzgerald contraction and obtained a totally different formula. A
very careful series of measurements carried out independently by Bücherer,

Wolz, Hupka and finally Neumann in 1913, decided conclusively in favour
of the Lorentz formula. This “contractile” formula follows immediately as a
direct consequence of the new Theory of Relativity, without any assumption
as regards the electrical origin of inertia. Thus the complete agreement of
experimental facts with the predictions of the new theory must be
considered as confirming it as a principle which goes even beyond the
electron itself. The greatest triumph of this new theory consists, indeed, in
the fact that a large number of results, which had formerly required all kinds
of special hypotheses for their explanation, are now deduced very simply as
inevitable consequences of one single general principle.
We have now traced the history of the development of the restricted or
special theory of Relativity, which is mainly concerned with optical and
electrical phenomena. It was first offered by Einstein in 1905. Ten years
later, Einstein formulated his second theory, the Generalised Principle of
Relativity. This new theory is mainly a theory of gravitation and has very
little connection with optics and electricity. In one sense, the second theory
is indeed a further generalisation of the restricted principle, but the former
does not really contain the latter as a special case.
Einstein’s first theory is restricted in the sense that it only refers to uniform
rectilinear motion and has no application to any kind of accelerated
movements. Einstein in his second theory extends the Relativity Principle to
cases of accelerated motion. If Relativity is to be universally true, then even
accelerated motion must be merely relative motion between matter and
matter. Hence the Generalised Principle of Relativity asserts that “absolute”
motion cannot be detected even with the help of gravitational laws.
All movements must be referred to definite sets of co-ordinate axes. If there
is any change of axes, the numerical magnitude of the movements will also
change. But according to Newtonian dynamics, such alteration in physical
movements can only be due to the effect of certain forces in the field.[5]
Thus any change of axes will introduce new “geometrical” forces in the
field which are quite independent of the nature of the body acted on.
Gravitational forces also have this same remarkable property, and
gravitation itself may be of essentially the same nature as these
“geometrical” forces introduced by a change of axes. This leads to
Einstein’s famous Principle of Equivalence. A gravitational field of force is

strictly equivalent to one introduced by a transformation of co-ordinates
and no possible experiment can distinguish between the two.
Thus it may become possible to “transform away” gravitational effects, at
least for sufficiently small regions of space, by referring all movements to a
new set of axes. This new “framework” may of course have all kinds of
very complicated movements when referred to the old Galilean or
“rectangular unaccelerated system of co-ordinates.”
But there is no reason why we should look upon the Galilean system as
more fundamental than any other. If it is found simpler to refer all motion in
a gravitational field to a special set of co-ordinates, we may certainly look
upon this special “framework” (at least for the particular region concerned),
to be more fundamental and more natural. We may, still more simply,
identify this particular framework with the special local properties of space
in that region. That is, we can look upon the effects of a gravitational field
as simply due to the local properties of space and time itself. The very
presence of matter implies a modification of the characteristics of space and
time in its neighbourhood. As Eddington says “matter does not cause the
curvature of space-time. It is the curvature. Just as light does not cause
electromagnetic oscillations; it is the oscillations.”
We may look upon this from a slightly different point of view. The General
Principle of Relativity asserts that all motion is merely relative motion
between matter and matter, and as all movements must be referred to
definite sets of co-ordinates, the ground of any possible framework must
ultimately be material in character. It is convenient to take the matter
actually present in a field as the fundamental ground of our framework. If
this is done, the special characteristics of our framework would naturally
depend on the actual distribution of matter in the field. But physical space
and time is completely defined by the “framework.” In other words the
“framework” itself is space and time. Hence we see how physical space and
time is actually defined by the local distribution of matter.
There are certain magnitudes which remain constant by any change of axes.
In ordinary geometry distance between two points is one such magnitude;
so that δx² + δy² + δz² is an invariant. In the restricted theory of light, the
principle of constancy of light velocity demands that δx² + δy² + δz² - c²δt²
should remain constant.

The separation ds of adjacent events is defined by ds² = -dx² - dy² - dz² +
c²dt². It is an extension of the notion of distance and this is the new
invariant. Now if x, y, z, t are transformed to any set of new variables x₁, x₂,
x₃, x₄, we shall get a quadratic expression for

where the g’s are functions of x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄ depending on the transformation.
The special properties of space and time in any region are defined by these
g’s which are themselves determined by the actual distribution of matter in
the locality. Thus from the Newtonian point of view, these g’s represent the
gravitational effect of matter while from the Relativity stand-point, these
merely define the non-Newtonian (and incidentally non-Euclidean) space in
the neighbourhood of matter.
We have seen that Einstein’s theory requires local curvature of space-time
in the neighbourhood of matter. Such altered characteristics of space and
time give a satisfactory explanation of an outstanding discrepancy in the
observed advance of perihelion of Mercury. The large discordance is almost
completely removed by Einstein’s theory.
Again, in an intense gravitational field, a beam of light will be affected by
the local curvature of space, so that to an observer who is referring all
phenomena to a Newtonian system, the beam of light will appear to deviate
from its path along an Euclidean straight line.
This famous prediction of Einstein about the deflection of a beam of light
by the sun’s gravitational field was tested during the total solar eclipse of
May, 1919. The observed deflection is decisively in favour of the
Generalised Theory of Relativity.
It should be noted however that the velocity of light itself would decrease in
a gravitational field. This may appear at first sight to be a violation of the
principle of constancy of light-velocity. But when we remember that the
Special Theory is explicitly restricted to the case of unaccelerated motion,
the difficulty vanishes. In the absence of a gravitational field, that is in any
unaccelerated system, the velocity of light will always remain constant.

Thus the validity of the Special Theory is completely preserved within its
own restricted field.
Einstein has proposed a third crucial test. He has predicted a shift of
spectral lines towards the red, due to an intense gravitational potential.
Experimental difficulties are very considerable here, as the shift of spectral
lines is a complex phenomenon. Evidence is conflicting and nothing
conclusive can yet be asserted. Einstein thought that a gravitational
displacement of the Fraunhofer lines is a necessary and fundamental
condition for the acceptance of his theory. But Eddington has pointed out
that even if this test fails, the logical conclusion would seem to be that
while Einstein’s law of gravitation is true for matter in bulk, it is not true for
such small material systems as atomic oscillator.

Conclusion

From the conceptual stand-point there are several important consequences
of the Generalised or Gravitational Theory of Relativity. Physical space-
time is perceived to be intimately connected with the actual local
distribution of matter. Euclid-Newtonian space-time is not the actual space-
time of Physics, simply because the former completely neglects the actual
presence of matter. Euclid-Newtonian continuum is merely an abstraction,
while physical space-*time is the actual framework which has some definite
curvature due to the presence of matter. Gravitational Theory of Relativity
thus brings out clearly the fundamental distinction between actual physical
space-time (which is non-isotropic and non-Euclid-Newtonian) on one hand
and the abstract Euclid-Newtonian continuum (which is homogeneous,
isotropic and a purely intellectual construction) on the other.
The measurements of the rotation of the earth reveals a fundamental
framework which may be called the “inertial framework.” This constitutes
the actual physical universe. This universe approaches Galilean space-time
at a great distance from matter.
The properties of this physical universe may be referred to some world-
distribution of matter or the “inertial framework” may be constructed by a
suitable modification of the law of gravitation itself. In Einstein’s theory the
actual curvature of the “inertial framework” is referred to vast quantities of
undetected world-matter. It has interesting consequences. The dimensions
of Einsteinian universe would depend on the quantity of matter in it; it
would vanish to a point in the total absence of matter. Then again curvature
depends on the quantity of matter, and hence in the presence of a sufficient
quantity of matter space-time may curve round and close up. Einsteinian
universe will then reduce to a finite system without boundaries, like the
surface of a sphere. In this “closed up” system, light rays will come to a
focus after travelling round the universe and we should see an “anti-sun”
(corresponding to the back surface of the sun) at a point in the sky opposite
to the real sun. This anti-sun would of course be equally large and equally
bright if there is no absorption of light in free space.

In de Sitter’s theory, the existence of vast quantities of world-matter is not
required. But beyond a definite distance from an observer, time itself stands
still, so that to the observer nothing can ever “happen” there. All these
theories are still highly speculative in character, but they have certainly
extended the scope of theoretical physics to the central problem of the
ultimate nature of the universe itself.
One outstanding peculiarity still attaches to the concept of electric force—it
is not amenable to any process of being “transformed away” by a suitable
change of framework. H. Weyl, it seems, has developed a geometrical
theory (in hyper-space) in which no fundamental distinction is made
between gravitational and electrical forces.
Einstein’s theory connects up the law of gravitation with the laws of
motion, and serves to establish a very intimate relationship between matter
and physical space-*time. Space, time and matter (or energy) were
considered to be the three ultimate elements in Physics. The restricted
theory fused space-time into one indissoluble whole. The generalised theory
has further synthesised space-time and matter into one fundamental
physical reality. Space, time and matter taken separately are more
abstractions. Physical reality consists of a synthesis of all three.
P. C. Mahalanobis.

Note A.

For example consider a massive particle resting on a circular disc. If we set
the disc rotating, a centrifugal force appears in the field. On the other hand,
if we transform to a set of rotating axes, we must introduce a centrifugal
force in order to correct for the change of axes. This newly introduced
centrifugal force is usually looked upon as a mathematical fiction—as
“geometrical” rather than physical. The presence of such a geometrical
force is usually interpreted as being due to the adoption of a fictitious
framework. On the other hand a gravitational force is considered quite real.
Thus a fundamental distinction is made between geometrical and
gravitational forces.
In the General Theory of Relativity, this fundamental distinction is done
away with. The very possibility of distinguishing between geometrical and
gravitational forces is denied. All axes of reference may now be regarded as
equally valid.
In the Restricted Theory, all “unaccelerated” axes of reference were
recognised as equally valid, so that physical laws were made independent of
uniform absolute velocity. In the General Theory, physical laws are made
independent of “absolute” motion of any kind.

On The Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies
By
A. Einstein.

INTRODUCTION.

It is well known that if we attempt to apply Maxwell’s electrodynamics, as
conceived at the present time, to moving bodies, we are led to asymmetry
which does not agree with observed phenomena. Let us think of the mutual
action between a magnet and a conductor. The observed phenomena in this
case depend only on the relative motion of the conductor and the magnet,
while according to the usual conception, a distinction must be made
between the cases where the one or the other of the bodies is in motion. If,
for example, the magnet moves and the conductor is at rest, then an electric
field of certain energy-value is produced in the neighbourhood of the
magnet, which excites a current in those parts of the field where a
conductor exists. But if the magnet be at rest and the conductor be set in
motion, no electric field is produced in the neighbourhood of the magnet,
but an electromotive force which corresponds to no energy in itself is
produced in the conductor; this causes an electric current of the same
magnitude and the same career as the electric force, it being of course
assumed that the relative motion in both of these cases is the same.
2. Examples of a similar kind such as the unsuccessful attempt to
substantiate the motion of the earth relative to the “Light-medium” lead us
to the supposition that not only in mechanics, but also in electrodynamics,
no properties of observed facts correspond to a concept of absolute rest; but
that for all coordinate systems for which the mechanical equations hold, the
equivalent electrodynamical and optical equations hold also, as has already
been shown for magnitudes of the first order. In the following we make
these assumptions (which we shall subsequently call the Principle of
Relativity) and introduce the further assumption,—an assumption which is
at the first sight quite irreconcilable with the former one—that light is
propagated in vacant space, with a velocity c which is independent of the
nature of motion of the emitting body. These two assumptions are quite
sufficient to give us a simple and consistent theory of electrodynamics of
moving bodies on the basis of the Maxwellian theory for bodies at rest. The
introduction of a “Lightäther” will be proved to be superfluous, for
according to the conceptions which will be developed, we shall introduce

neither a space absolutely at rest, and endowed with special properties, nor
shall we associate a velocity-vector with a point in which electro-magnetic
processes take place.
3. Like every other theory in electrodynamics, the theory is based on the
kinematics of rigid bodies; in the enunciation of every theory, we have to do
with relations between rigid bodies (co-ordinate system), clocks, and
electromagnetic processes. An insufficient consideration of these
circumstances is the cause of difficulties with which the electrodynamics of
moving bodies have to fight at present.

I.—KINEMATICAL PORTION.

§ 1. Definition of Synchronism.

Let us have a co-ordinate system, in which the Newtonian equations hold.
For distinguishing this system from another which will be introduced
hereafter, we shall always call it “the stationary system.”
If a material point be at rest in this system, then its position in this system
can be found out by a measuring rod, and can be expressed by the methods
of Euclidean Geometry, or in Cartesian co-ordinates.
If we wish to describe the motion of a material point, the values of its
coordinates must be expressed as functions of time. It is always to be borne
in mind that such a mathematical definition has a physical sense, only when
we have a clear notion of what is meant by time. We have to take into
consideration the fact that those of our conceptions, in which time plays a
part, are always conceptions of synchronism. For example, we say that a
train arrives here at 7 o’clock; this means that the exact pointing of the little
hand of my watch to 7, and the arrival of the train are synchronous events.
It may appear that all difficulties connected with the definition of time can
be removed when in place of time, we substitute the position of the little
hand of my watch. Such a definition is in fact sufficient, when it is required
to define time exclusively for the place at which the clock is stationed. But
the definition is not sufficient when it is required to connect by time events
taking place at different stations,—or what amounts to the same thing,—to
estimate by means of time (zeitlich werten) the occurrence of events, which
take place at stations distant from the clock.
Now with regard to this attempt;—the time-estimation of events, we can
satisfy ourselves in the following manner. Suppose an observer—who is
stationed at the origin of coordinates with the clock—associates a ray of
light which comes to him through space, and gives testimony to the event of
which the time is to be estimated,—with the corresponding position of the
hands of the clock. But such an association has this defect,—it depends on

the position of the observer provided with the clock, as we know by
experience. We can attain to a more practicable result by the following
treatment.
If an observer be stationed at A with a clock, he can estimate the time of
events occurring in the immediate neighbourhood of A, by looking for the
position of the hands of the clock, which are synchronous with the event. If
an observer be stationed at B with a clock,—we should add that the clock is
of the same nature as the one at A,—he can estimate the time of events
occurring about B. But without further premises, it is not possible to
compare, as far as time is concerned, the events at B with the events at A.
We have hitherto an A-time, and a B-time, but no time common to A and B.
This last time (i.e., common time) can be defined, if we establish by
definition that the time which light requires in travelling from A to B is
equivalent to the time which light requires in travelling from B to A. For
example, a ray of light proceeds from A at A-time tA towards B, arrives and
is reflected from B at B-time tB, and returns to A at A-time t′A. According to
the definition, both clocks are synchronous, if

tB - tA = t′A - tB.

We assume that this definition of synchronism is possible without involving
any inconsistency, for any number of points, therefore the following
relations hold:—
1. If the clock at B be synchronous with the clock at A, then the clock at A
is synchronous with the clock at B.
2. If the clock at A as well as the clock at B are both synchronous with the
clock at C, then the clocks at A and B are synchronous.
Thus with the help of certain physical experiences, we have established
what we understand when we speak of clocks at rest at different stations,
and synchronous with one another; and thereby we have arrived at a
definition of synchronism and time.
In accordance with experience we shall assume that the magnitude

where c is a universal constant.
We have defined time essentially with a clock at rest in a stationary system.
On account of its adaptability to the stationary system, we call the time
defined in this way as “time of the stationary system.”

§ 2. On the Relativity of Length and Time.

The following reflections are based on the Principle of Relativity and on the
Principle of Constancy of the velocity of light, both of which we define in
the following way:—
1. The laws according to which the nature of physical systems alter are
independent of the manner in which these changes are referred to two co-
ordinate systems which have a uniform translators motion relative to each
other.
2. Every ray of light moves in the “stationary co-ordinate system” with the
same velocity c, the velocity being independent of the condition whether
this ray of light is emitted by a body at rest or in motion.[6] Therefore

velocity = Path of Light/Interval of time,

where, by ‘interval of time’ we mean time as defined in §1.
Let us have a rigid rod at rest; this has a length l, when measured by a
measuring rod at rest; we suppose that the axis of the rod is laid along the
X-axis of the system at rest, and then a uniform velocity v, parallel to the
axis of X, is imparted to it. Let us now enquire about the length of the
moving rod; this can be obtained by either of these operations.—
(a) The observer provided with the measuring rod moves along with the rod
to be measured, and measures by direct superposition the length of the rod:

—just as if the observer, the measuring rod, and the rod to be measured
were at rest.
(b) The observer finds out, by means of clocks placed in a system at rest
(the clocks being synchronous as defined in §1), the points of this system
where the ends of the rod to be measured occur at a particular time t. The
distance between these two points, measured by the previously used
measuring rod, this time it being at rest, is a length, which we may call the
“length of the rod.”
According to the Principle of Relativity, the length found out by the
operation a), which we may call “the length of the rod in the moving
system” is equal to the length l of the rod in the stationary system.
The length which is found out by the second method, may be called ‘the
length of the moving rod measured from the stationary system.’ This length
is to be estimated on the basis of our principle, and we shall find it to be
different from l.
In the generally recognised kinematics, we silently assume that the lengths
defined by these two operations are equal, or in other words, that at an
epoch of time t, a moving rigid body is geometrically replaceable by the
same body, which can replace it in the condition of rest.

Relativity of Time.

Let us suppose that the two clocks synchronous with the clocks in the
system at rest are brought to the ends A, and B of a rod, i.e., the time of the
clocks correspond to the time of the stationary system at the points where
they happen to arrive; these clocks are therefore synchronous in the
stationary system.
We further imagine that there are two observers at the two watches, and
moving with them, and that these observers apply the criterion for
synchronism to the two clocks. At the time tA, a ray of light goes out from
A, is reflected from B at the time tB, and arrives back at A at time t′A.
Taking into consideration the principle of, constancy of the velocity of light,
we have

tB - tA = rAB/(c - v),

and t′A - tB = rAB/(c + v),

where rAB is the length of the moving rod, measured in the stationary
system. Therefore the observers stationed with the watches will not find the
clocks synchronous, though the observer in the stationary system must
declare the clocks to be synchronous. We therefore see that we can attach
no absolute significance to the concept of synchronism; but two events
which are synchronous when viewed from one system, will not be
synchronous when viewed from a system moving relatively to this system.

§ 3. Theory of Co-ordinate and Time-Transformation from a stationary
system to a system which moves relatively to this with uniform velocity.

Let there be given, in the stationary system two co-ordinate systems, i.e.,
two series of three mutually perpendicular lines issuing from a point. Let
the X-axes of each coincide with one another, and the Y and Z-axes be
parallel. Let a rigid measuring rod, and a number of clocks be given to each
of the systems, and let the rods and clocks in each be exactly alike each
other.
Let the initial point of one of the systems (k) have a constant velocity in the
direction of the X-axis of the other which is stationary system K, the motion
being also communicated to the rods and clocks in the system (k). Any time
t of the stationary system K corresponds to a definite position of the axes of
the moving system, which are always parallel to the axes of the stationary
system. By t, we always mean the time in the stationary system.
We suppose that the space is measured by the stationary measuring rod
placed in the stationary system, as well as by the moving measuring rod
placed in the moving system, and we thus obtain the co-ordinates (x, y, z)
for the stationary system, and (ξ, η, ζ) for the moving system. Let the time t
be determined for each point of the stationary system (which are provided
with clocks) by means of the clocks which are placed in the stationary
system, with the help of light-signals as described in § 1. Let also the time τ

of the moving system be determined for each point of the moving system
(in which there are clocks which are at rest relative to the moving system),
by means of the method of light signals between these points (in which
there are clocks) in the manner described in § 1.
To every value of (x, y, z, t) which fully determines the position and time of
an event in the stationary system, there correspond a system of values (ξ, η,
ζ, τ); now the problem is to find out the system of equations connecting
these magnitudes.
Primarily it is clear that on account of the property of homogeneity which
we ascribe to time and space, the equations must be linear.
If we put x′ = x - vt, then it is clear that at a point relatively at rest in the
system k, we have a system of values (x′ y z) which are independent of time.
Now let us find out τ as a function of (x′, y, z, t). For this purpose we have
to express in equations the fact that τ is not other than the time given by the
clocks which are at rest in the system k which must be made synchronous in
the manner described in § 1.
Let a ray of light be sent at time τ₀ from the origin of the system k along the
X-axis towards x′ and let it be reflected from that place at time τ₁ towards
the origin of moving co-ordinates and let it arrive there at time τ₂; then we
must have

½ (τ0 + τ2) = τ1

If we now introduce the condition that τ is a function of co-ordinates, and
apply the principle of constancy of the velocity of light in the stationary
system, we have

It is to be noticed that instead of the origin of co-ordinates, we could select
some other point as the exit point for rays of light, and therefore the above
equation holds for all values of (x′, y, z, t,).
A similar conception, being applied to the y- and z-axis gives us, when we
take into consideration the fact that light when viewed from the stationary
system, is always propagated along those axes with the velocity √(c² - v²),
we have the questions

∂ ∂τ
---- = 0, ---- = 0.
∂y ∂z

From these equations it follows that τ is a linear function of x′ and t. From
equations (1) we obtain

vx′
τ = a (t - --------- )
c2 - v2

where a is an unknown function of v.
With the help of these results it is easy to obtain the magnitudes (ξ, η, ζ) if
we express by means of equations the fact that light, when measured in the
moving system is always propagated with the constant velocity c (as the
principle of constancy of light velocity in conjunction with the principle of
relativity requires). For a time τ = 0, if the ray is sent in the direction of
increasing ξ, we have

vx′
ξ = cτ, i.e. ξ = a c(t - ------------ )
c2 - v2

Now the ray of light moves relative to the origin of k with a velocity c - v,
measured in the stationary system; therefore we have

x′
-------- = t
c-v

Substituting these values of t in the equation for ξ, we obtain

c2
ξ = a ------------ x′
c2 - v2

In an analogous manner, we obtain by considering the ray of light which
moves along the y-axis,

vx′
η = cτ = a c(t - ----------- )
c2 - v2

where

y
------------- = t, x′ = 0,
√ (c2 - v2)

Therefore

c
η = a ------------- y,
√ (c2 - v2)

c
ζ = a --------------- z .
√ (c2 - v2)

If for x′, we substitute its value x - tv, we obtain

v.c
τ = φ (v). β (t - ------- ,
c2

ξ = φ (v). β (x - vt) ,

η = φ (v) y

ζ = φ (v) z ,

where

and

φ (v) = ac / √ (c2 - v2) = a / β

is a function of v.
If we make no assumption about the initial position of the moving system
and about the null-point of t, then an additive constant is to be added to the
right hand side.
We have now to show, that every ray of light moves in the moving system
with a velocity c (when measured in the moving system), in case, as we
have actually assumed, c is also the velocity in the stationary system; for we
have not as yet adduced any proof in support of the assumption that the
principle of relativity is reconcilable with the principle of constant light-
velocity.
At a time τ = t = 0 let a spherical wave be sent out from the common origin
of the two systems of co-ordinates, and let it spread with a velocity c in the
system K. If (x, y, z), be a point reached by the wave, we have

x2 + y2 + z2 = c2t2

with the aid of our transformation-equations, let us transform this equation,
and we obtain by a simple calculation,

ξ2 + η2 + ζ2 = c2τ2.

Therefore the wave is propagated in the moving system with the same
velocity c, and as a spherical wave.[7] Therefore we show that the two
principles are mutually reconcilable.
In the transformations we have got an undetermined function φ(v), and we
now proceed to find it out.
Let us introduce for this purpose a third co-ordinate system k′, which is set
in motion relative to the system k, the motion being parallel to the ξ-axis.
Let the velocity of the origin be (-v). At the time t = 0, all the initial co-
ordinate points coincide, and for t = x = y = z = 0, the time t′ of the system k′
= 0. We shall say that (x′ y′ z′ t′) are the co-ordinates measured in the system
k′, then by a two-fold application of the transformation-equations, we obtain

v
τ′ = φ(-v)β(-v){τ + --- ξ}
c2
= φ(v)φ(-v)t,

x′ = φ](v)β(v)(ξ + vτ)
= φ(v)φ(-v)x, etc.

Since the relations between (x′, y′, z′, t′), and (x, y, z, t) do not contain time
explicitly, therefore K and k′ are relatively at rest.
It appears that the systems K and k′ are identical.

∴ φ(v)φ(-v) = 1.

Let us now turn our attention to the part of the ξ-axis between (ξ = 0, η = 0,
ζ = 0), and (ξ = 0, η = 1, ζ = 0). Let this piece of the y-axis be covered with
a rod moving with the velocity v relative to the system K and perpendicular
to its axis;—the ends of the rod having therefore the co-ordinates

x1 = vt, y1 = l / φ(v), z1 = 0

x2 = vt, y2 = 0, z2 = 0

Therefore the length of the rod measured in the system K is l/φ(v). For the
system moving with velocity (-v), we have on grounds of symmetry,

l l
------ = ------
φ(v) φ(-v)

∴ φ(v) = φ(-v), ∴ φ(v) = 1.

§ 4. The physical significance of the equations obtained concerning moving
rigid bodies and moving clocks.

Let us consider a rigid sphere (i.e., one having a spherical figure when
tested in the stationary system) of radius R which is at rest relative to the
system (K), and whose centre coincides with the origin of K then the
equation of the surface of this sphere, which is moving with a velocity v
relative to K, is

ξ2 + η2 + ζ2 = R2.

At time t = 0, the equation is expressed by means of (x, y, z, t,) as

A rigid body which has the figure of a sphere when measured in the moving
system, has therefore in the moving condition—when considered from the
stationary system, the figure of a rotational ellipsoid with semi-axes

Therefore the y and z dimensions of the sphere (therefore of any figure also)
do not appear to be modified by the motion, but the x dimension is
shortened in the ratio

the shortening is the larger, the larger is v. For v = c, all moving bodies,
when considered from a stationary system shrink into planes. For a velocity
larger than the velocity of light, our propositions become meaningless; in
our theory c plays the part of infinite velocity.
It is clear that similar results hold about stationary bodies in a stationary
system when considered from a uniformly moving system.
Let us now consider that a clock which is lying at rest in the stationary
system gives the time t, and lying at rest relative to the moving system is
capable of giving the time τ; suppose it to be placed at the origin of the
moving system k, and to be so arranged that it gives the time τ. How much
does the clock gain, when viewed from the stationary system K? We have,

Therefore the clock loses by an amount ½(v²/c²) per second of motion, to
the second order of approximation.
From this, the following peculiar consequence follows. Suppose at two
points A and B of the stationary system two clocks are given which are
synchronous in the sense explained in § 3 when viewed from the stationary
system. Suppose the clock at A to be set in motion in the line joining it with
B, then after the arrival of the clock at B, they will no longer be found
synchronous, but the clock which was set in motion from A will lag behind
the clock which had been all along at B by an amount ½t(v²/c²), where t is
the time required for the journey.
We see forthwith that the result holds also when the clock moves from A to
B by a polygonal line, and also when A and B coincide.
If we assume that the result obtained for a polygonal line holds also for a
curved line, we obtain the following law. If at A, there be two synchronous
clocks, and if we set in motion one of them with a constant velocity along a
closed curve till it comes back to A, the journey being completed in t-
seconds, then after arrival, the last mentioned clock will be behind the
stationary one by ½t(v²/c²) seconds. From this, we conclude that a clock
placed at the equator must be slower by a very small amount than a
similarly constructed clock which is placed at the pole, all other conditions
being identical.

§ 5. Addition-Theorem of Velocities.

Let a point move in the system k (which moves with velocity v along the x-
axis of the system K) according to the equation

where wξ and wη are constants.
It is required to find out the motion of the point relative to the system K. If
we now introduce the system of equations in § 3 in the equation of motion

of the point, we obtain

The law of parallelogram of velocities hold up to the first order of
approximation. We can put

and

i.e., α is put equal to the angle between the velocities v, and w. Then we
have—

It should be noticed that v and w enter into the expression for velocity
symmetrically. If w has the direction of the ξ-axis of the moving system,

From this equation, we see that by combining two velocities, each of which
is smaller than c, we obtain a velocity which is always smaller than c. If we
put v = c - χ, and w = c - λ, where χ and λ are each smaller than c,[8]

It is also clear that the velocity of light c cannot be altered by adding to it a
velocity smaller than c. For this case,

We have obtained the formula for U for the case when v and w have the
same direction; it can also be obtained by combining two transformations
according to section § 3. If in addition to the systems K, and k, we
introduce the system k´, of which the initial point moves parallel to the ξ-
axis with velocity w, then between the magnitudes, x, y, z, t and the
corresponding magnitudes of k´, we obtain a system of equations, which
differ from the equations in § 3, only in the respect that in place of v, we
shall have to write,

We see that such a parallel transformation forms a group.
We have deduced the kinematics corresponding to our two fundamental
principles for the laws necessary for us, and we shall now pass over to their
application in electrodynamics.

II.—ELECTRODYNAMICAL PART.

§ 6. Transformation of Maxwell’s equations for Pure Vacuum.

On the nature of the Electromotive Force caused by motion in a magnetic
field.

The Maxwell-Hertz equations for pure vacuum may hold for the stationary
system K, so that

and

"Equation 1."

where [X, Y, Z] are the components of the electric force, L, M, N are the
components of the magnetic force.
If we apply the transformations in §3 to these equations, and if we refer the
electromagnetic processes to the co-ordinate system moving with velocity
v, we obtain,

and

"Equation 2."

where

The principle of Relativity requires that the Maxwell-Hertzian equations for
pure vacuum shall hold also for the system k, if they hold for the system K,
i.e., for the vectors of the electric and magnetic forces acting upon electric
and magnetic masses in the moving system k, which are defined by their
pondermotive reaction, the same equations hold, ... i.e. ...

" Equation 3."

Clearly both the systems of equations (2) and (3) developed for the system
k shall express the same things, for both of these systems are equivalent to
the Maxwell-Hertzian equations for the system K. Since both the systems of
equations (2) and (3) agree up to the symbols representing the vectors, it
follows that the functions occurring at corresponding places will agree up to
a certain factor ψ(v), which depends only on v, and is independent of (ξ, η,
ζ, τ). Hence the relations,

v v
[X′, Y′, Z′] = ψ (v) [X, β(Y - ----- N), β(Z + ------ M)],
c c

v v
[L′, M′, N′] = ψ (v) [L, β(M - ----- Z), β(N + ----- Y)],
c c

Then by reasoning similar to that followed in §(3), it can be shown that ψ(v)
= 1.

v v
[X′, Y′, Z′] = [X, β(Y - ---- N), β(Z + ----- M)]
c c

v v
[L′, M′, N′] = [L, β(M - ---- Z), β(N + ----- Y)],
c c

For the interpretation of these equations, we make the following remarks.
Let us have a point-mass of electricity which is of magnitude unity in the
stationary system K, i.e., it exerts a unit force upon a similar quantity placed
at a distance of 1 cm. If this quantity of electricity be at rest in the stationary
system, then the force acting upon it is equivalent to the vector (X, Y, Z) of
electric force. But if the quantity of electricity be at rest relative to the
moving system (at least for the moment considered), then the force acting
upon it, and measured in the moving system is equivalent to the vector (X′,
Y′, Z′). The first three of equations (1), (2), (3), can be expressed in the
following way:—
1. If a point-mass of electric unit pole moves in an electro-magnetic field,
then besides the electric force, an electromotive force acts upon it, which,
neglecting the numbers involving the second and higher powers of v/c, is
equivalent to the vector-product of the velocity vector, and the magnetic
force divided by the velocity of light (Old mode of expression).
2. If a point-mass of electric unit pole moves in an electro-magnetic field,
then the force acting upon it is equivalent to the electric force existing at the
position of the unit pole, which we obtain by the transformation of the field
to a co-ordinate system which is at rest relative to the electric unit pole
[New mode of expression].
Similar theorems hold with reference to the magnetic force. We see that in
the theory developed the electro-magnetic force plays the part of an
auxiliary concept, which owes its introduction in theory to the circumstance
that the electric and magnetic forces possess no existence independent of
the nature of motion of the co-ordinate system.
It is further clear that the asymmetry mentioned in the introduction which
occurs when we treat of the current excited by the relative motion of a

magnet and a conductor disappears. Also the question about the seat of
electromagnetic energy is seen to be without any meaning.

§ 7. Theory of Döppler’s Principle and Aberration.

In the system K, at a great distance from the origin of co-ordinates, let there
be a source of electrodynamic waves, which is represented with sufficient
approximation in a part of space not containing the origin, by the equations:
—

X = X₀ sin Φ
Y = Y₀ sin Φ
Z = Z₀ sin Φ
L = L₀ sin Φ
M = M₀ sin Φ
N = N₀ sin Φ
lx + my + nz
Φ = ω(t - --------------------- )
c

Here (X₀, Y₀, Z₀) and (L₀, M₀, N₀) are the vectors which determine the
amplitudes of the train of waves, (l, m, n) are the direction-cosines of the
wave-normal.
Let us now ask ourselves about the composition of these waves, when they
are investigated by an observer at rest in a moving medium k:—By
applying the equations of transformation obtained in §6 for the electric and
magnetic forces, and the equations of transformation obtained in § 3 for the
co-ordinates, and time, we obtain immediately:—

X′ = X₀ sin Φ′

v
Y′ = β(Y₀ - --- N₀) sin Φ′
c

v
Z′ = β(Z₀ - --- M₀) sin Φ′
c

L′ = L₀ sin Φ′

v
M′ = β(M₀ - --- Z₀) sin Φ′
c

v
N′ = β(N₀ - --- Y₀) sin Φ′
c

l′ξ + m′η + n′ζ
Φ′ = ω′(t - ---------------------- )
c

where

From the equation for ω′ it follows:—If an observer moves with the
velocity v relative to an infinitely distant source of light emitting waves of
frequency ν, in such a manner that the line joining the source of light and
the observer makes an angle of Φ with the velocity of the observer referred
to a system of co-ordinates which is stationary with regard to the source,

then the frequency ν′ which is perceived by the observer is represented by
the formula

This is Döppler’s principle for any velocity. If Φ = 0, then the equation
takes the simple form

We see that—contrary to the usual conception—ν = ∞, for v = -c.
If Φ′ = angle between the wave-normal (direction of the ray) in the moving
system, and the line of motion of the observer, the equation for l´ takes the
form

This equation expresses the law of observation in its most general form. If
Φ = π/2, the equation takes the simple form

v
cos Φ′ = ---
c

We have still to investigate the amplitude of the waves, which occur in
these equations. If A and A′ be the amplitudes in the stationary and the
moving systems (either electrical or magnetic), we have

If Φ = 0, this reduces to the simple form

From these equations, it appears that for an observer, which moves with the
velocity c towards the source of light, the source should appear infinitely
intense.

§ 8. Transformation of the Energy of the Rays of Light. Theory of the
Radiation-pressure on a perfect mirror.

Since A²/8π is equal to the energy of light per unit volume, we have to
regard A²/8π as the energy of light in the moving system. A′²/A² would
therefore denote the ratio between the energies of a definite light-complex
“measured when moving” and “measured when stationary,” the volumes of
the light-complex measured in K and k being equal. Yet this is not the case.
If l, m, n are the direction-cosines of the wave-normal of light in the
stationary system, then no energy passes through the surface elements of the
spherical surface

(x - clt)² + (y - cmt)² + (z - cnt)² = R²,

which expands with the velocity of light. We can therefore say, that this
surface always encloses the same light-complex. Let us now consider the
quantity of energy, which this surface encloses, when regarded from the
system k, i.e., the energy of the light-complex relative to the system k.
Regarded from the moving system, the spherical surface becomes an
ellipsoidal surface, having, at the time τ = 0, the equation:—

If S = volume of the sphere, S′ = volume of this ellipsoid, then a simple
calculation shows that:

If E denotes the quantity of light energy measured in the stationary system,
E′ the quantity measured in the moving system, which are enclosed by the
surfaces mentioned above, then

If Φ = 0, we have the simple formula:—

It is to be noticed that the energy and the frequency of a light-complex vary
according to the same law with the state of motion of the observer.
Let there be a perfectly reflecting mirror at the co-ordinate-plane ξ = 0,
from which the plane-wave considered in the last paragraph is reflected. Let
us now ask ourselves about the light-pressure exerted on the reflecting
surface and the direction, frequency, intensity of the light after reflexion.
Let the incident light be defined by the magnitudes A cos Φ, v (referred to
the system K). Regarded from k, we have the corresponding magnitudes:

For the reflected light we obtain, when the process is referred to the system
k:—

A″ = A′, cos Φ″ = -cos Φ″, ν″ = ν′

By means of a back-transformation to the stationary system, we obtain K,
for the reflected light:—

The amount or energy falling upon the unit surface of the mirror per unit of
time (measured in the stationary system) is A²/(8π (c cos Φ - v)). The
amount of energy going away from unit surface of the mirror per unit of
time is A‴²/(8π (-c cos Φ″ + v)). The difference of these two expressions is,
according to the Energy principle, the amount of work exerted, by the
pressure of light per unit of time. If we put this equal to P.v, where P =
pressure of light, we have

As a first approximation, we obtain

A²
P = 2 ---- cos² Φ
8π

which is in accordance with facts, and with other theories.
All problems of optics of moving bodies can be solved after the method
used here. The essential point is, that the electric and magnetic forces of
light, which are influenced by a moving body, should be transformed to a

system of co-ordinates which is stationary relative to the body. In this way,
every problem of the optics of moving bodies would be reduced to a series
of problems of the optics of stationary bodies.

§ 9. Transformation of the Maxwell-Hertz Equations.

Let us start from the equations:—

where

denotes 4π times the density of electricity, and (ux, uy, uz) are the velocity-
components of electricity. If we now suppose that the electrical-masses are
bound unchangeably to small, rigid bodies (Ions, electrons), then these
equations form the electromagnetic basis of Lorentz’s electrodynamics and
optics for moving bodies.
If these equations which hold in the system K, are transformed to the
system k with the aid of the transformation-equations given in § 3 and § 6,
then we obtain the equations:—

where

Since the vector (uξ, uη, uζ) is nothing but the velocity of the electrical mass
measured in the system k, as can be easily seen from the addition-theorem
of velocities in § 4—so it is hereby shown, that by taking our kinematical
principle as the basis, the electromagnetic basis of Lorentz’s theory of
electrodynamics of moving bodies correspond to the relativity-postulate. It
can be briefly remarked here that the following important law follows easily
from the equations developed in the present section:—if an electrically
charged body moves in any manner in space, and if its charge does not
change thereby, when regarded from a system moving along with it, then
the charge remains constant even when it is regarded from the stationary
system K.

§ 10. Dynamics of the Electron (slowly accelerated).

Let us suppose that a point-shaped particle, having the electrical charge e
(to be called henceforth the electron) moves in the electromagnetic field; we
assume the following about its law of motion.
If the electron be at rest at any definite epoch, then in the next “particle of
time,” the motion takes place according to the equations

d²x d²y d²z
m ----- = eX, m ----- = eY, m ----- = eZ
dt² dt² dt²

Where (x, y, z) are the co-ordinates of the electron, and m is its mass.
Let the electron possess the velocity v at a certain epoch of time. Let us now
investigate the laws according to which the electron will move in the
‘particle of time’ immediately following this epoch.
Without influencing the generality of treatment, we can and we will assume
that, at the moment we are considering, the electron is at the origin of co-
ordinates, and moves with the velocity v along the X-axis of the system. It
is clear that at this moment (t = 0) the electron is at rest relative to the
system k, which moves parallel to the X-axis with the constant velocity v.
From the suppositions made above, in combination with the principle of
relativity, it is clear that regarded from the system k, the electron moves
according to the equations

d²ξ d²η d²ζ
m ----- = eX′, m ----- = eY′, m ----- = eZ′ ,
dτ² dτ² dτ²

in the time immediately following the moment, where the symbols (ξ, η, ζ,
τ, X’, Y’, Z’) refer to the system k. If we now fix, that for t = v = y = z = 0, τ
= ξ = η = ζ = 0, then the equations of transformation given in § 3 (and § 6)
hold, and we have:

v
τ = β(t - ---- x), ξ = β(x - vt), η = y, ζ = z,
c²

v v
X′ = X, Y′ = β(Y - --- N), Z′ = β(Z + --- M)
c c

With the aid of these equations, we can transform the above equations of
motion from the system k to the system K, and obtain:—

Let us now consider, following the usual method of treatment, the
longitudinal and transversal mass of a moving electron. We write the
equations (A) in the form

d²x
mβ² ----- = eX = eX′
dt²

d²y v
mβ² ----- = eβ (Y - --- N) = eY′
dt² c

d²z v
mβ² ----- = eβ (Z - --- M) = eZ′
dt² c

and let us first remark, that eX′, eY′, eZ′ are the components of the
ponderomotive force acting upon the electron, and are considered in a

moving system which, at this moment, moves with a velocity which is
equal to that of the electron. This force can, for example, be measured by
means of a spring-balance which is at rest in this last system. If we briefly
call this force as “the force acting upon the electron,” and maintain the
equation:—
Mass-number × acceleration-number = force-number, and if we further fix
that the accelerations are measured in the stationary system K, then from
the above equations, we obtain:—
Longitudinal mass:

Transversal mass:

Naturally, when other definitions are given of the force and the acceleration,
other numbers are obtained for the mass; hence we see that we must
proceed very carefully in comparing the different theories of the motion of
the electron.
We remark that this result about the mass hold also for ponderable material
mass; for in our sense, a ponderable material point may be made into an
electron by the addition of an electrical charge which may be as small as
possible.
Let us now determine the kinetic energy of the electron. If the electron
moves from the origin of co-ordinates of the system K with the initial
velocity 0 steadily along the X-axis under the action of an electromotive

force X, then it is clear that the energy drawn from the electrostatic field has
the value ∫eXdx. Since the electron is only slowly accelerated, and in
consequence, no energy is given out in the form of radiation, therefore the
energy drawn from the electro-static field may be put equal to the energy W
of motion. Considering the whole process of motion in questions, the first
of equations A) holds, we obtain:—

For v = c, W is infinitely great. As our former result shows, velocities
exceeding that of light can have no possibility of existence.
In consequence of the arguments mentioned above, this expression for
kinetic energy must also hold for ponderable masses.
We can now enumerate the characteristics of the motion of the electrons
available for experimental verification, which follow from equations A).
1. From the second of equations A), it follows that an electrical force Y, and
a magnetic force N produce equal deflexions of an electron moving with the
velocity v, when Y = Nv/c. Therefore we see that according to our theory, it
is possible to obtain the velocity of an electron from the ratio of the
magnetic deflexion Am, and the electric deflexion Ae, by applying the law:
—

This relation can be tested by means of experiments because the velocity of
the electron can be directly measured by means of rapidly oscillating
electric and magnetic fields.

2. From the value which is deduced for the kinetic energy of the electron, it
follows that when the electron falls through a potential difference of P, the
velocity v which is acquired is given by the following relation:—

3. We calculate the radius of curvature R of the path, where the only
deflecting force is a magnetic force N acting perpendicular to the velocity
of projection. From the second of equations A) we obtain:

or

mvβc
R = --------
eN

These three relations are complete expressions for the law of motion of the
electron according to the above theory.

ALBRECHT EINSTEIN
[A short biographical note.]

The name of Prof. Albrecht Einstein has now spread far beyond the narrow
pale of scientific investigators owing to the brilliant confirmation of his
predicted deflection of light-rays by the gravitational field of the sun during
the total solar eclipse of May 29, 1919. But to the serious student of
science, he has been known from the beginning of the current century, and
many dark problems in physics has been illuminated with the lustre of his
genius, before, owing to the latest sensation just mentioned, he flashes out
before public imagination as a scientific star of the first magnitude.
Einstein is a Swiss-German of Jewish extraction, and began his scientific
career as a privat-dozent in the Swiss University of Zürich about the year
1902. Later on, he migrated to the German University of Prague in
Bohemia as ausser-ordentliche (or associate) Professor. In 1914, through the
exertions of Prof. M. Planck of the Berlin University, he was appointed a
paid member of the Royal (now National) Prussian Academy of Sciences,
on a salary of 18,000 marks per year. In this post, he has only to do and
guide research work. Another distinguished occupant of the same post was
Van’t Hoff, the eminent physical chemist.
It is rather difficult to give a detailed, and consistent chronological account
of his scientific activities,—they are so variegated, and cover such a wide
field. The first work which gained him distinction was an investigation on
Brownian Movement. An admirable account will be found in Perrin’s book
‘The Atoms.’ Starting from Boltzmann’s theorem connecting the entropy,
and the probability of a state, he deduced a formula on the mean
displacement of small particles (colloidal) suspended in a liquid. This
formula gives us one of the best methods for finding out a very fundamental
number in physics—namely—the number of molecules in one gm.

molecule of gas (Avogadro’s number). The formula was shortly afterwards
verified by Perrin, Prof. of Chemical Physics in the Sorbonne, Paris.
To Einstein is also due the resuscitation of Planck’s quantum theory of
energy-emission. This theory has not yet caught the popular imagination to
the same extent as the new theory of Time, and Space, but it is none the less
iconoclastic in its scope as far as classical concepts are concerned. It was
known for a long time that the observed emission of light from a heated
black body did not correspond to the formula which could be deduced from
the older classical theories of continuous emission and propagation. In the
year 1900, Prof. Planck of the Berlin University worked out a formula
which was based on the bold assumption that energy was emitted and
absorbed by the molecules in multiples of the quantity hν, where h is a
constant (which is universal like the constant of gravitation), and ν is the
frequency of the light.
The conception was so radically different from all accepted theories that in
spite of the great success of Planck’s radiation formula in explaining the
observed facts of black-body radiation, it did not meet with much favour
from the physicists. In fact, some one remarked jocularly that according to
Planck, energy flies out of a radiator like a swarm of gnats.
But Einstein found a support for the new-born concept in another direction.
It was known that if green or ultraviolet light was allowed to fall on a plate
of some alkali metal, the plate lost electrons. The electrons were emitted
with all velocities, but there is generally a maximum limit. From the
investigations of Lenard and Ladenburg, the curious discovery was made
that this maximum velocity of emission did not at all depend upon the
intensity of light, but upon its wavelength. The more violet was the light,
the greater was the velocity of emission.
To account for this fact, Einstein made the bold assumption that the light is
propagated in space as a unit pulse (he calls it a Light-cell), and falling
upon an individual atom, liberates electrons according to the energy
equation

1
hν = --- mv² + A,
2

where (m, v) are the mass and velocity of the electron. A is a constant
characteristic of the metal plate.
There was little material for the confirmation of this law when it was first
proposed (1905), and eleven years elapsed before Prof. Millikan
established, by a set of experiments scarcely rivalled for the ingenuity, skill,
and care displayed, the absolute truth of the law. As results of this
confirmation, and other brilliant triumphs, the quantum law is now regarded
as a fundamental law of Energetics. In recent years, X-rays have been added
to the domain of light, and in this direction also, Einstein’s photo-electric
formula has proved to be one of the most fruitful conceptions in Physics.
The quantum law was next extended by Einstein to the problems of
decrease of specific heat at low temperature, and here also his theory was
confirmed in a brilliant manner.
We pass over his other contributions to the equation of state, to the
problems of null-point energy, and photo-chemical reactions. The recent
experimental works of Nernst and Warburg seem to indicate that through
Einstein’s genius, we are probably for the first time having a satisfactory
theory of photo-chemical action.
In 1915, Einstein made an excursion into Experimental Physics, and here
also, in his characteristic way, he tackled one of the most fundamental
concepts of Physics. It is well-known that according to Ampere, the
magnetisation of iron and iron-like bodies, when placed within a coil
carrying an electric current is due to the excitation in the metal of small
electrical circuits. But the conception though a very fruitful one, long
remained without a trace of experimental proof, though after the discovery
of the electron, it was generally believed that these molecular currents may
be due to the rotational motion of free electrons within the metal. It is easily
seen that if in the process of magnetisation, a number of electrons be set
into rotatory motion, then these will impart to the metal itself a turning
couple. The experiment is a rather difficult one, and many physicists tried in
vain to observe the effect. But in collaboration with de Haas, Einstein
planned and successfully carried out this experiment, and proved the
essential correctness of Ampere’s views.
Einstein’s studies on Relativity were commenced in the year 1905, and has
been continued up to the present time. The first paper in the present

collection forms Einstein’s first great contribution to the Principle of
Special Relativity. We have recounted in the introduction how out of the
chaos and disorder into which the electrodynamics and optics of moving
bodies had fallen previous to 1895, Lorentz, Einstein and Minkowski have
succeeded in building up a consistent, and fruitful new theory of Time and
Space.
But Einstein was not satisfied with the study of the special problem of
Relativity for uniform motion, but tried, in a series of papers beginning
from 1911, to extend it to the case of non-uniform motion. The last paper in
the present collection is a translation of a comprehensive article which he
contributed to the Annalen der Physik in 1916 on this subject, and gives, in
his own words, the Principles of Generalized Relativity. The triumphs of
this theory are now matters of public knowledge.
Einstein is now only 45, and it is to be hoped that science will continue to
be enriched, for a long time to come, with further achievements of his
genius.

Principle of Relativity

INTRODUCTION.

At the present time, different opinions are being held about the fundamental
equations of Electro-dynamics for moving bodies. The Hertzian[9] forms
must be given up, for it has appeared that they are contrary to many
experimental results.
In 1895 H. A. Lorentz[10] published his theory of optical and electrical
phenomena in moving bodies; this theory was based upon the atomistic
conception (vorstellung) of electricity, and on account of its great success
appears to have justified the bold hypotheses, by which it has been ushered
into existence. In his theory, Lorentz proceeds from certain equations,
which must hold at every point of “Äther”; then by forming the average
values over “Physically infinitely small” regions, which however contain
large numbers of electrons, the equations for electro-magnetic processes in
moving bodies can be successfully built up.
In particular, Lorentz’s theory gives a good account of the non-existence of
relative motion of the earth and the luminiferous “Äther”; it shows that this
fact is intimately connected with the covariance of the original equation,
when certain simultaneous transformations of the space and time co-
ordinates are effected; these transformations have therefore obtained from
H. Poincare[11] the name of Lorentz-transformations. The covariance of
these fundamental equations, when subjected to the Lorentz-transformation
is a purely mathematical fact i.e. not based on any physical considerations; I
will call this the Theorem of Relativity; this theorem rests essentially on the
form of the differential equations for the propagation of waves with the
velocity of light.
Now without recognizing any hypothesis about the connection between
“Äther” and matter, we can expect these mathematically evident theorems
to have their consequences so far extended—that thereby even those laws of
ponderable media which are yet unknown may anyhow possess this
covariance when subjected to a Lorentz-transformation; by saying this, we
do not indeed express an opinion, but rather a conviction,—and this
conviction I may be permitted to call the Postulate of Relativity. The

position of affairs here is almost the same as when the Principle of
Conservation of Energy was postulated in cases, where the corresponding
forms of energy were unknown.
Now if hereafter, we succeed in maintaining this covariance as a definite
connection between pure and simple observable phenomena in moving
bodies, the definite connection may be styled ‘the Principle of Relativity.’
These differentiations seem to me to be necessary for enabling us to
characterise the present day position of the electro-dynamics for moving
bodies.
H. A. Lorentz[12] has found out the “Relativity theorem” and has created the
Relativity-postulate as a hypothesis that electrons and matter suffer
contractions in consequence of their motion according to a certain law.
A. Einstein[13] has brought out the point very clearly, that this postulate is
not an artificial hypothesis but is rather a new way of comprehending the
time-concept which is forced upon us by observation of natural phenomena.
The Principle of Relativity has not yet been formulated for electro-
dynamics of moving bodies in the sense characterized by me. In the present
essay, while formulating this principle, I shall obtain the fundamental
equations for moving bodies in a sense which is uniquely determined by
this principle.
But it will be shown that none of the forms hitherto assumed for these
equations can exactly fit in with this principle.[14]
We would at first expect that the fundamental equations which are assumed
by Lorentz for moving bodies would correspond to the Relativity Principle.
But it will be shown that this is not the case for the general equations which
Lorentz has for any possible, and also for magnetic bodies; but this is
approximately the case (if neglect the square of the velocity of matter in
comparison to the velocity of light) for those equations which Lorentz
hereafter infers for non-magnetic bodies. But this latter accordance with the
Relativity Principle is due to the fact that the condition of non-
magnetisation has been formulated in a way not corresponding to the
Relativity Principle; therefore the accordance is due to the fortuitous
compensation of two contradictions to the Relativity-Postulate. But
meanwhile enunciation of the Principle in a rigid manner does not signify

any contradiction to the hypotheses of Lorentz’s molecular theory, but it
shall become clear that the assumption of the contraction of the electron in
Lorentz’s theory must be introduced at an earlier stage than Lorentz has
actually done.
In an appendix, I have gone into discussion of the position of Classical
Mechanics with respect to the Relativity Postulate. Any easily perceivable
modification of mechanics for satisfying the requirements of the Relativity
theory would hardly afford any noticeable difference in observable
processes; but would lead to very surprising consequences. By laying down
the Relativity-Postulate from the outset, sufficient means have been created
for deducing henceforth the complete series of Laws of Mechanics from the
principle of conservation of Energy alone (the form of the Energy being
given in explicit forms).

NOTATIONS.

Let a rectangular system (x, y, z, t,) of reference be given in space and time.
The unit of time shall be chosen in such a manner with reference to the unit
of length that the velocity of light in space becomes unity.
Although I would prefer not to change the notations used by Lorentz, it
appears important to me to use a different selection of symbols, for thereby
certain homogeneity will appear from the very beginning. I shall denote the
vector electric force by E, the magnetic induction by M, the electric
induction by e and the magnetic force by m, so that (E, M, e, m) are used
instead of Lorentz’s (E, B, D, H) respectively.
I shall further make use of complex magnitudes in a way which is not yet
current in physical investigations, i.e., instead of operating with (t), I shall
operate with (i t), where i denotes √(-1). If now instead of (x, y, z, i t), I use
the method of writing with indices, certain essential circumstances will
come into evidence; on this will be based a general use of the suffixes (1, 2,
3, 4). The advantage of this method will be, as I expressly emphasize here,
that we shall have to handle symbols which have apparently a purely real
appearance; we can however at any moment pass to real equations if it is
understood that of the symbols with indices, such ones as have the suffix 4

only once, denote imaginary quantities, while those which have not at all
the suffix 4, or have it twice denote real quantities.
An individual system of values of (x, y, z, t) i. e., of (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄) shall be
called a space-time point.
Further let u denote the velocity vector of matter, ε the dielectric constant, μ
the magnetic permeability, σ the conductivity of matter, while ρ denotes the
density of electricity in space, and x the vector of “Electric Current” which
we shall some across in §7 and §8.

PART I
§ 2.
The Limiting Case.
The Fundamental Equations for Äther.

By using the electron theory, Lorentz in his above mentioned essay traces
the Laws of Electro-dynamics of Ponderable Bodies to still simpler laws.
Let us now adhere to these simpler laws, whereby we require that for the
limiting case ε = 1, μ = 1, σ = 0, they should constitute the laws for
ponderable bodies. In this ideal limiting case ε = 1, μ = 1, σ = 0, E will be
equal to e, and M to m. At every space time point (x, y, z, t) we shall have
the equations[15]

(i) Curl m - (δe/δt) = ρu

(ii) div e = ρ

(iii) Curl e + δm/δt = 0

(iv) div m = 0

I shall now write (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄) for (x, y, z, t) and (ρ₁, ρ₂, ρ₃, ρ₄) for

i.e. the components of the convection current ρu, and the electric density
multiplied by √ -1
Further I shall write

f2 3, f3 1, f1 2, f1 4, f2 4, f3 4.

for

mx, my, mz, -iex, -iey, -iez.

i.e., the components of m and (-i.e.) along the three axes; now if we take
any two indices (h. k) out of the series

3, 4), fk h = -fk h,

Therefore

f₃₂ = -f₂₃, f₁₃ = -f₃₁, f₂₁ = -f₁₂
f₄₁ = -f₁₄, f₄₄ = -f₂₄, f₄₃ = -f₃₄

Then the three equations comprised in (i), and the equation (ii) multiplied
by i becomes

"Formula A."

On the other hand, the three equations comprised in (iii) and the (iv)
equation multiplied by (i) becomes

"Formula B."

By means of this method of writing we at once notice the perfect symmetry
of the 1st as well as the 2nd system of equations as regards permutation
with the indices, (1, 2, 3, 4).

§ 3.

It is well-known that by writing the equations i) to iv) in the symbol of
vector calculus, we at once set in evidence an invariance (or rather a
(covariance) of the system of equations A) as well as of B), when the co-
ordinate system is rotated through a certain amount round the null-point.
For example, if we take a rotation of the axes round the z-axis, through an
amount φ, keeping e, m fixed in space, and introduce new variables x₁′ x₂′
x₃′ x₄′ instead of x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄ where x′₁ = x₁ cos φ + x₂ sin φ, x′₂ = -x₁ sin φ +
x₂ cos φ, x′₃ = x₃, x′₄ = x₄, and introduce magnitudes ρ′₁, ρ′₂, ρ′₃, ρ′₄, where
ρ₁′ = ρ₁ cos φ + ρ₂ sin φ, ρ₂′ = - ρ₁ sin φ + ρ₂ cos φ and f′1 2, ... ... f′3 4, where

f′₂₃ = f₂₃ cos φ + f₃₁ sin φ,
f′₃₁ = - f₂₃ sin φ + f₃₁ cos φ,
f′₁₂ = f₁₂,
f′₁₄ = f₁₄ cos φ + f₂₄ sin φ,
f′₂₄ = - f₁₄ sin φ + f₂₄ cos φ,
f′₃₄ = f₃₄3 4,
f′k h = - fk h (h l k = 1, 2, 3, 4).

then out of the equations (A) would follow a corresponding system of
dashed equations (A´) composed of the newly introduced dashed
magnitudes.
So upon the ground of symmetry alone of the equations (A) and (B)
concerning the suffixes (1, 2, 3, 4), the theorem of Relativity, which was
found out by Lorentz, follows without any calculation at all.
I will denote by iψ a purely imaginary magnitude, and consider the
substitution

x₁′ = x₁,
x₂′ = x₂,
x₃′ = x₃ cos iψ + x₄ sin iψ, (1)
x₄′´ = - x₃ sin iψ + x₄ cos iψ,

Putting

"(2)."

We shall have cos iψ = 1/√(1 - q²), sin iψ = iq/√(1 - q²) where -1 < q < 1,
and √(1 - q²) is always to be taken with the positive sign.
Let us now write x′₁ = x′, x′₂ = y′, x′₃ = z′, x′₄ = it′ (3)
then the substitution 1) takes the form

x′ = x, y′ = y, z′ = (z - qt)/√(1 - q²), t′ = (-qz + t)/√(1 - q²), (4)

the coefficients being essentially real.
If now in the above-mentioned rotation round the Z-axis, we replace 1, 2, 3,
4 throughout by 3, 4, 1, 2, and φ by iψ, we at once perceive that
simultaneously, new magnitudes ρ′₁, ρ′₂, ρ′₃, ρ′₄, where

ρ′₁ = ρ₁, ρ′₂ = ρ₂, ρ′₃ = ρ₃ cos iψ + ρ₄ sin iψ,
ρ′₄ = - ρ₃ sin iψ + ρ₄ cos iψ),

and f′1 2 ... f′3 4, where

f′4 1 = f4 1 cos iψ + f1 3 sin iψ,
f′1 3 = - f4 1 sin iψ + f1 3 cos iψ,
f′3 4 = f3 4,
f′3 2 = f3 2 cos iψ + f4 2 sin iψ,
f′4 2 = - f3 2 sin iψ + f4 2 cos iψ,
f′1 2 = f1 2, fk h = - f′k h,

must be introduced. Then the systems of equations in (A) and (B) are
transformed into equations (A´), and (B´), the new equations being obtained
by simply dashing the old set.
All these equations can be written in purely real figures, and we can then
formulate the last result as follows.
If the real transformations 4) are taken, and x´ y´ z´ t´ be taken as a new
frame of reference, then we shall have

(5) ρ´ = ρ [(-quz + 1)/√(1 - q²)],
ρ´uz´ = ρ[(uz - q)/√(1 - q²)],
ρ´ux´ = ρux,
ρ´uy´ = ρuy.

(6) e´x´ = (ex - qmy)/(√(1 - q²)),
m´r´ = (qex + my)/(√(1 - q²)),
e´z´ = ez.

(7) m´x´ = (mx - qey)/(√(1 - q²)),
e´y´ = (qmx + ey)/(√(1 - q²)),
m´z´ = mz.

Then we have for these newly introduced vectors u´, e´, m´ (with
components ux´, uy´, uz´; ex´, ey´, ez´; mx´, my´, mz´), and the quantity ρ´ a
series of equations I´), II´), III´), IV´) which are obtained from I), II), III),
IV) by simply dashing the symbols.

We remark here that ex - qmy, ey + qmx are components of the vector e +
[vm], where v is a vector in the direction of the positive Z-axis, and | v | = q,
and [vm] is the vector product of v and m; similarly -qex + my, mx + qey are
the components of the vector m - [ve].
The equations 6) and 7), as they stand in pairs, can be expressed as.

e′x′ + im′x′ = (ex + imx) cos iψ + (ey + imy) sin iψ,

e′y′ + im′y′ = - (ex + imx) sin iψ + (ey + imy) cos iψ,

e′z′ + im′z′ = e′z + imz.

If φ denotes any other real angle, we can form the following combinations:
—

(e′x′ + im′x′) cos. φ + (e′y″ + im′y′) sin φ

= (ex + imx) cos. (φ + iψ) + (ey + imy) sin (φ + iψ),

= (e′x′ + im′x′) sin φ + (e′y′ + im′y′) cos. φ

= - (ex + imx) sin (φ + iψ) + (ey + imy) cos. (φ + iψ).

§ 4. Special Lorentz Transformation.

The rôle which is played by the Z-axis in the transformation (4) can easily
be transferred to any other axis when the system of axes are subjected to a
transformation about this last axis. So we came to a more general law:—
Let v be a vector with the components vx, vy, vz, and let | v | = q < 1. By ṽ we
shall denote any vector which is perpendicular to v, and by rv, rṽ we shall
denote components of r in direction of ṽ and v.
Instead of (x, y, z, t), new magnetudes (x′ y′ z′ t′) will be introduced in the
following way. If for the sake of shortness, r is written for the vector with
the components (x, y, z) in the first system of reference, r′ for the same
vector with the components (x′ y′ z′) in the second system of reference, then
for the direction of v, we have

(10) r′v = (rv - qt)/√(1 - q²)

and for the perpendicular direction ṽ,

(11) r′ṽ = rṽ

and further (12) t′ = (-qrv + t)/√(1 - q²).
The notations (r′ṽ, r′v) are to be understood in the sense that with the
directions v, and every direction ṽ perpendicular to v in the system (x, y, z)
are always associated the directions with the same direction cosines in the
system (x′ y′ z′).
A transformation which is accomplished by means of (10), (11), (12) with
the condition 0 < q < 1 will be called a special Lorentz-transformation. We
shall call v the vector, the direction of v the axis, and the magnitude of v the
moment of this transformation.

If further ρ′ and the vectors u′, e′, m′, in the system (x′ y′ z′) are so defined
that,

(13) ρ′ = ρ[(-quv + 1)/√(1 - q²)],
ρ′u′v = ρ(uv - q)/√(1 - q²),
ρ′uṽ = ρ′uv,

further

(14) (e′ + im′)ṽ = ((e + im) - i[v, (e + im])']ṽ)/√(1 - q²).

(15) (e′ + im′)v = (e + im) - i[u, (e + im)]v.

Then it follows that the equations I), II), III), IV) are transformed into the
corresponding system with dashes.
The solution of the equations (10), (11), (12) leads to

(16) rv = (r′v + qt′)/√(1 - q²),
rṽ = r′ṽ,
t = (qr′v + t′)/√(1 - q²),

Now we shall make a very important observation about the vectors u and u′.
We can again introduce the indices 1, 2, 3, 4, so that we write (x₁′, x₂′, x₃′,
x₄′) instead of (x′, y′, z′, it′) and ρ₁′, ρ₂′, ρ₃′, ρ₄′ instead of (ρ′u′{x′}, ρ′u′{y′},
ρ′u′{z′}, iρ′).
Like the rotation round the Z-axis, the transformation (4), and more
generally the transformations (10), (11), (12), are also linear
transformations with the determinant + 1, so that

(17) x₁² + x₂² + x₃² + x₄² i. e. x² + y² + z² - t²,

is transformed into

x₁′² + x₂′² + x₃′² + x₄′² i. e. x′² + y′² + z′² - t′².

On the basis of the equations (13), (14), we shall have (ρ₁² + ρ₂² + ρ₃² + ρ₄²)
= ρ²(1 - ux², -uy², -uz²) = ρ²(1 - u²) transformed into ρ²(1 - u²) or in other
words,

(18) ρ√(1 - u²)

is an invariant in a Lorentz-transformation.
If we divide (ρ₁, ρ₂, ρ₃, ρ₄) by this magnitude, we obtain the four values (ω₁,
ω₂, ω₃, ω₄) = (1/√(1 - u²))(ux, uy, uz, i) so that ω₁² + ω₂² + ω₃² + ω₄² = -1.
It is apparent that these four values are determined by the vector u and
inversely the vector u of magnitude < 1 follows from the 4 values ω₁, ω₂,
ω₃, ω₄; where (ω₁, ω₂, ω₃) are real, -iω₄ real and positive and condition (19)
is fulfilled.
The meaning of (ω₁, ω₂, ω₃, ω₄) here is, that they are the ratios of dx₁, dx₂,
dx₃, dx₄ to

(20) √(-(dx₁² + dx₂² + dx₃² + dx₄²)) = dt√(1 - u²).

The differentials denoting the displacements of matter occupying the
spacetime point (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄) to the adjacent space-time point.
After the Lorentz-transformation is accomplished the velocity of matter in
the new system of reference for the same space-time point (x′ y′ z′ t′) is the
vector u′ with the ratios dx′/dt′, dy′/dt′, dz′/dt′, dl′/dt′, as components.
Now it is quite apparent that the system of values

x₁ = ω₁, x₂ = ω₂, x₃ = ω₃, x₄ = ω₄

is transformed into the values

x₁′ = ω₁′, x₂′ = ω₂′, x₃′ = ω₃′, x₄′ = ω₄′

in virtue of the Lorentz-transformation (10), (11), (12).
The dashed system has got the same meaning for the velocity u′ after the
transformation as the first system of values has got for u before
transformation.
If in particular the vector v of the special Lorentz-transformation be equal to
the velocity vector u of matter at the space-time point (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄) then it
follows out of (10), (11), (12) that

ω₁′ = 0, ω₂′ = 0, ω₃′ = 0, ω₄′ = i

Under these circumstances therefore, the corresponding space-time point
has the velocity v′ = 0 after the transformation, it is as if we transform to
rest. We may call the invariant ρ√(1 - u²) the rest-density of Electricity.[16]

§ 5. Space-time Vectors.
Of the 1st and 2nd kind.

If we take the principal result of the Lorentz transformation together with
the fact that the system (A) as well as the system (B) is covariant with
respect to a rotation of the coordinate-system round the null point, we
obtain the general relativity theorem. In order to make the facts easily
comprehensible, it may be more convenient to define a series of
expressions, for the purpose of expressing the ideas in a concise form, while
on the other hand I shall adhere to the practice of using complex
magnitudes, in order to render certain symmetries quite evident.
Let us take a linear homogeneous transformation,

the Determinant of the matrix is +1, all co-efficients without the index 4
occurring once are real, while a₄₁, a₄₂, a₄₃, are purely imaginary, but a₄₄ is
real and > 0, and x₁² + x₂² + x₃² + x₄² transforms into x₁′² + x₂′² + x₃′² + x₄′².
The operation shall be called a general Lorentz transformation.
(This notation, which is due to Dr. C. E. Cullis of the Calcutta University,
has been used throughout instead of Minkowski’s notation, x₁ = a₁₁x₁′ +
a₁₂x₂′+ a₁₃x₃′+ a₁₄x₄′.)
If we put x₁′ = x′, x₂′ = y′, x₃′ = z′, x₄′ = it′, then immediately there occurs a
homogeneous linear transformation of (x, y, z, t) to (x′, y′, z′, t′) with
essentially real co-efficients, whereby the aggregate -x² - y² - z² + t²
transforms into -x′² - y′² - z′² + t′², and to every such system of values x, y, z,
t with a positive t, for which this aggregate > 0, there always corresponds a
positive t’; this last is quite evident from the continuity of the aggregate x,
y, z, t.

The last vertical column of co-efficients has to fulfil the condition 22) a₁₄² +
a₂₄² + a₃₄² + a₄₄² = 1.
If a₁₄ = a₂₄ = a₃₄ = 0, then a₄₄ = 1, and the Lorentz transformation reduces
to a simple rotation of the spatial co-ordinate system round the world-point.
If a₁₄, a₂₄, a₃₄ are not all zero, and if we put a₁₄ : a₂₄ : a₃₄ : a₄₄ = vx : vy : vz :
i

q = √(vx² + vy² +vz²) < 1.

On the other hand, with every set of values of a₁₄, a₂₄, a₃₄, a₄₄ which in this
way fulfil the condition 22) with real values of vx, vy, vz, we can construct
the special Lorentz transformation (16) with (a₁₄, a₂₄, a₃₄, a₄₄) as the last
vertical column,—and then every Lorentz-transformation with the same last
vertical column (a₁₄, a₂₄, a₃₄, a₄₄) can be supposed to be composed of the
special Lorentz-transformation, and a rotation of the spatial co-ordinate
system round the null-point.
The totality of all Lorentz-Transformations forms a group. Under a space-
time vector of the 1st kind shall be understood a system of four magnitudes
(ρ₁, ρ₂, ρ₃, ρ₄) with the condition that in case of a Lorentz-transformation it
is to be replaced by the set (ρ₁′, ρ₂′, ρ₃′, ρ₄′), where these are the values of
(x₁′, x₂′, x₃′, x₄′), obtained by substituting (ρ₁, ρ₂, ρ₃, ρ₄) for (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄) in
the expression (21).
Besides the time-space vector of the 1st kind (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄) we shall also
make use of another space-time vector of the first kind (y₁, y₂, y₃, y₄), and
let us form the linear combination

(23) f₂₃(x₂y₃ - x₃y₂) + f₃₁(x₃y₁ - x₁y₃) + f₁₂(x₁y₂
- x₂y₁) + f₁₄(x₁y₄ - x₄y₁) + f₂₄(x₂y₄ - x₄y₂) +
f₃₄(x₃y₄ - x₄y₃)

with six coefficients f₂₃--f₃₄. Let us remark that in the vectorial method of
writing, this can be constructed out of the four vectors.

x₁, x₂, x₃; y₁, y₂, y₃; f₂₃, f₃₁, f₁₂; f₁₄, f₂₄, f₃₄ and the constants x₄ and y₄, at the
same time it is symmetrical with regard the indices (1, 2, 3, 4).
If we subject (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄) and (y₁, y₂, y₃, y₄) simultaneously to the Lorentz
transformation (21), the combination (23) is changed to:

(24) f₂₃′(x₂′y₃′ - x₃′y₂′) + f₃₁(x₃′y₁′ - x₁′y₃′) + f₁₂
(x₁′y₂′ - x₂′y₁′) + f₁₄′(x₁′y₄′) - x₄′y₁′) + f₂₄′(x₂′y₄′
- x₄′y₂′) + f₃₄′(x₃′y₄′ - x₄′y₃′),

where the coefficients f₂₃′, f₃₁′, f₁₂′, f₁₄′, f₂₄′, f₃₄′, depend solely on (f₂₃ f₂₄)
and the coefficients a₁₁ ... a₄₄.
We shall define a space-time Vector of the 2nd kind as a system of six-
magnitudes f₂₃, f₃₁ ... f₃₄, with the condition that when subjected to a
Lorentz transformation, it is changed to a new system f₂₃′ ... f₃₄, ... which
satisfies the connection between (23) and (24).
I enunciate in the following manner the general theorem of relativity
corresponding to the equations (I)-(iv),—which are the fundamental
equations for Äther.
If x, y, z, it (space co-ordinates, and time it) is subjected to a Lorentz
transformation, and at the same time (pux, puy, puz, iρ) (convection-current,
and charge density ρi) is transformed as a space time vector of the 1st kind,
further (mx, my, mz, -iex, -iey, -iez) (magnetic force, and electric induction ×
(-i) is transformed as a space time vector of the 2nd kind, then the system of
equations (I), (II), and the system of equations (III), (IV) transforms into
essentially corresponding relations between the corresponding magnitudes
newly introduced into the system.
These facts can be more concisely expressed in these words: the system of
equations (I and II) as well as the system of equations (III) (IV) are
covariant in all cases of Lorentz-transformation, where (ρu, iρ) is to be
transformed as a space time vector of the 1st kind, (m - ie) is to be treated as
a vector of the 2nd kind, or more significantly,—
(ρu, iρ) is a space time vector of the 1st kind, (m - ie)[17] is a space-time
vector of the 2nd kind.

I shall add a few more remarks here in order to elucidate the conception of
space-time vector of the 2nd kind. Clearly, the following are invariants for
such a vector when subjected to a group of Lorentz transformation.

(i) m² - e² = f₂₃² + f₃₁² + f₁₂² + f₁₄² + f₂₄² + f₂₄²

me = i(f₂₃f₁₄ + f₃₁f₂₄ + f₁₂f₃₄).

A space-time vector of the second kind (m - ie), where (m and e) are real
magnitudes, may be called singular, when the scalar square (m - ie)² = 0, ie
m² - e² = 0, and at the same time (m e) = 0, ie the vector m and e are equal
and perpendicular to each other; when such is the case, these two properties
remain conserved for the space-time vector of the 2nd kind in every
Lorentz-transformation.
If the space-time vector of the 2nd kind is not singular, we rotate the spacial
co-ordinate system in such a manner that the vector-product [me] coincides
with the Z-axis, i.e. mx = 0, ex = 0. Then

(mx, -i ex)² + (my, -i ey)² ≠ 0.

Therefore (ey + i my)/(ex + i ex) is different from +i, and we can therefore
define a complex argument (φ + iψ) in such a manner that

tan (φ + iψ)

ey + i my
= ---------------
ex + i mx

If then, by referring back to equations (9), we carry out the transformation
(1) through the angle ψ and a subsequent rotation round the Z-axis through
the angle φ, we perform a Lorentz-transformation at the end of which my =
0, ey = 0, and therefore m and e shall both coincide with the new Z-axis.
Then by means of the invariants m² - e², (me) the final values of these

vectors, whether they are of the same or of opposite directions, or whether
one of them is equal to zero, would be at once settled.

§ 6. Concept of Time.

By the Lorentz transformation, we are allowed to effect certain changes of
the time parameter. In consequence of this fact, it is no longer permissible
to speak of the absolute simultaneity of two events. The ordinary idea of
simultaneity rather presupposes that six independent parameters, which are
evidently required for defining a system of space and time axes, are
somehow reduced to three. Since we are accustomed to consider that these
limitations represent in a unique way the actual facts very approximately,
we maintain that the simultaneity of two events exists of themselves.[18] In
fact, the following considerations will prove conclusive.
Let a reference system (x, y, z, t) for space time points (events) be somehow
known. Now if a space point A (x₀, y₀, z₀) the time t₀ be compared with a
space point P (x, y, z) at the time t, and if the difference of time t - t₀, (let t >
t₀) be less than the length A P i.e. less than the time required for the
propagation of light from A to P, and if q = (t - t₀)/(A P) < 1, then by a
special Lorentz transformation, in which A P is taken as the axis, and which
has the moment q, we can introduce a time parameter t′, which (see
equation 11, 12, § 4) has got the same value t′ = 0 for both space-time
points (A, t₀), and (P, t). So the two events can now be comprehended to be
simultaneous.
Further, let us take at the same time t₀ = 0, two different space-points A, B,
or three space-points (A, B, C) which are not in the same space-line, and
compare therewith a space point P, which is outside the line A B, or the
plane A B C, at another time t, and let the time difference t - t₀ (t > t₀) be
less than the time which light requires for propagation from the line A B, or
the plane (A B C) to P. Let q be the quotient of (t - t₀) by the second time.
Then if a Lorentz transformation is taken in which the perpendicular from P
on A B, or from P on the plane A B C is the axis, and q is the moment, then
all the three (or four) events (A, t₀), (B, t₀), (C, t₀) and (P, t) are
simultaneous.
If four space-points, which do not lie in one plane, are conceived to be at
the same time t₀, then it is no longer permissible to make a change of the

time parameter by a Lorentz-transformation, without at the same time
destroying the character of the simultaneity of these four space points.
To the mathematician, accustomed on the one hand to the methods of
treatment of the poly-dimensional manifold, and on the other hand to the
conceptual figures of the so-called non-Euclidean Geometry, there can be
no difficulty in adopting this concept of time to the application of the
Lorentz-transformation. The paper of Einstein which has been cited in the
Introduction, has succeeded to some extent in presenting the nature of the
transformation from the physical standpoint.

PART II. ELECTRO-MAGNETIC PHENOMENA.
§ 7. Fundamental Equations for bodies at rest.

After these preparatory works, which have been first developed on account
of the small amount of mathematics involved in the limiting case ε = 1, μ =
1, σ = 0, let us turn to the electro-magnetic phenomena in matter. We look
for those relations which make it possible for us—when proper fundamental
data are given—to obtain the following quantities at every place and time,
and therefore at every space-time point as functions of (x, y, z, t):—the
vector of the electric force E, the magnetic induction M, the electrical
induction e, the magnetic force m, the electrical space-density ρ, the electric
current s (whose relation hereafter to the conduction current is known by
the manner in which conductivity occurs in the process), and lastly the
vector v, the velocity of matter.
The relations in question can be divided into two classes.
Firstly—those equations, which,—when v, the velocity of matter is given as
a function of (x, y, z, t),—lead us to a knowledge of other magnitude as
functions of x, y, z, t—I shall call this first class of equations the
fundamental equations—
Secondly, the expressions for the ponderomotive force, which, by the
application of the Laws of Mechanics, gives us further information about
the vector u as functions of (x, y, z, t).
For the case of bodies at rest, i.e. when u (x, y, z, t) = 0 the theories of
Maxwell (Heaviside, Hertz) and Lorentz lead to the same fundamental
equations. They are;—
(1) The Differential Equations:—which contain no constant referring to
matter:—

(i) Curl m - δe/δt = C,
(ii) div e = lρ.
(iii) Curl E + δM/δt = 0,
(iv) Div M = 0.

(2) Further relations, which characterise the influence of existing matter for
the most important case to which we limit ourselves i.e. for isotopic bodies;
—they are comprised in the equations

(V) e = ε E, M = μm, C = σE.

where ε = dielectric constant, μ = magnetic permeability, σ = the
conductivity of matter, all given as function of x, y, z, t; s is here the
conduction current.
By employing a modified form of writing, I shall now cause a latent
symmetry in these equations to appear. I put, as in the previous work,

x₁ = x, x₂ = y, x₃ = z, x₄ = it,

and write s₁, s₂, s₃, s₄ for Cx, Cy, Cz (√-1)ρ.
Further f₂₃, f₃₁, f₁₂, f₁₄, f₂₄, f₃₄
for mx, my, mz, -i(ex, ey, ez),
and F₂₃, F₃₁, F₁₂, F₁₄, F₂₄, F₃₄
for Mx, My, Mz, -i(Ex, Ey, Ez)
lastly we shall have the relation fk h = - fh k, Fk h = -Fh k, (the letter f, F shall
denote the field, s the (i.e. current).
Then the fundamental Equations can be written as

(A)
∂f₁₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₁₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₁₄/∂x₄ = s₁

∂f₂₁/∂x₁ + + ∂f₂₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₂₄/∂x₄ = s₂

∂f₃₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₃₂/∂x₂ + + ∂f₃₄/∂x₄ = s₃

∂f₄₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₄₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₄₃/∂x₃ = s₄

and the equations (3) and (4), are

∂F₃₄/∂x₂ + ∂F₄₂/∂x₃ + ∂F₂₃/∂x₄ = 0

∂F₄₃/∂x₁ + + ∂F₁₄/∂x₃ + ∂F₃₁∂x₄ = 0

∂F₂₄/∂x₁ + ∂F₄₁/∂x₂ + + ∂F₁₂/∂x₄ = 0

∂F₃₂/∂x₁ + ∂F₁₃/∂x₂ + ∂F₂₁/∂x₃ =0

§ 8. The Fundamental Equations.

We are now in a position to establish in a unique way the fundamental
equations for bodies moving in any manner by means of these three axioms
exclusively.
The first Axion shall be,—
When a detached region[19] of matter is at rest at any moment, therefore the
vector u is zero, for a system (x, y, z, t)—the neighbourhood may be
supposed to be in motion in any possible manner, then for the space-time
point x, y, z, t, the same relations (A) (B) (V) which hold in the case when
all matter is at rest, shall also hold between ρ, the vectors C, e, m, M, E and
their differentials with respect to x, y, z, t. The second axiom shall be:—
Every velocity of matter is < 1, smaller than the velocity of propagation of
light.[20]
The fundamental equations are of such a kind that when (x, y, z, it) are
subjected to a Lorentz transformation and thereby (m - ie) and (M - iE) are
transformed into space-time vectors of the second kind, (C, iρ) as a space-
time vector of the 1st kind, the equations are transformed into essentially
identical forms involving the transformed magnitudes.
Shortly I can signify the third axiom as:—
(m, -ie), and (M, -iE) are space-time vectors of the second kind, (C, ip) is a
space-time vector of the first kind.
This axiom I call the Principle of Relativity.
In fact these three axioms lead us from the previously mentioned
fundamental equations for bodies at rest to the equations for moving bodies
in an unambiguous way.
According to the second axiom, the magnitude of the velocity vector | u | is
< 1 at any space-time point. In consequence, we can always write, instead
of the vector u, the following set of four allied quantities

ω₁ = ux/√(1 - u²),
ω₂ = uy/√(1 - u²),
ω₃ = uz/√(1 - u²),
ω₄ = i/√(1 - u²)

with the relation

(27) ω₁² + ω₂² + ω₃² + ω₄² = - |

From what has been said at the end of § 4, it is clear that in the case of a
Lorentz-transformation, this set behaves like a space-time vector of the 1st
kind.
Let us now fix our attention on a certain point (x, y, z) of matter at a certain
time (t). If at this space-time point u = 0, then we have at once for this point
the equations (A), (B) (V) of § 7. If u ≠ 0, then there exists according to 16),
in case | u | < 1, a special Lorentz-transformation, whose vector v is equal to
this vector u (x, y, z, t), and we pass on to a new system of reference (x′ y′ z′
t′) in accordance with this transformation. Therefore for the space-time
point considered, there arises as in § 4, the new values 28) ω′₁ = 0, ω′₂ = 0,
ω′₃ = 0, ω′₄ = i, therefore the new velocity vector ω′ = 0, the space-time
point is as if transformed to rest. Now according to the third axiom the
system of equations for the transformed point (x′ y′ z′ t) involves the newly
introduced magnitude (u′ ρ′, C′, e′, m′, E′, M′) and their differential
quotients with respect to (x′, y′, z′, t′) in the same manner as the original
equations for the point (x, y, z, t). But according to the first axiom, when u′
= 0, these equations must be exactly equivalent to
(1) the differential equations (A′), (B′), which are obtained from the
equations (A), (B) by simply dashing the symbols in (A) and (B).
(2) and the equations

(V′) e′ = εE′, M’ = μm′, C′ = σE′

where ε, μ, σ are the dielectric constant, magnetic permeability, and
conductivity for the system (x′ y′ z′ t′) i.e. in the space-time point (x y, z t) of
matter.
Now let us return, by means of the reciprocal Lorentz-transformation to the
original variables (x, y, z, t), and the magnitudes (u, ρ, C, e, m, E, M) and
the equations, which we then obtain from the last mentioned, will be the
fundamental equations sought by us for the moving bodies.
Now from § 4, and § 6, it is to be seen that the equations A), as well as the
equations B) are covariant for a Lorentz-transformation, i.e. the equations,
which we obtain backwards from A′) B′), must be exactly of the same form
as the equations A) and B), as we take them for bodies at rest. We have
therefore as the first result:—
The differential equations expressing the fundamental equations of
electrodynamics for moving bodies, when written in ρ and the vectors C, e,
m, E, M, are exactly of the same form as the equations for moving bodies.
The velocity of matter does not enter in these equations. In the vectorial
way of writing, we have

I) curl m - ∂e/∂t = C₁,

II) div e = ρ

III) curl E + ∂M/∂t = 0

IV) div M = 0

The velocity of matter occurs only in the auxiliary equations which
characterise the influence of matter on the basis of their characteristic
constants ε, μ, σ. Let us now transform these auxiliary equations V′) into the
original co-ordinates (x, y, z, and t.)
According to formula 15) in § 4, the component of e′ in the direction of the
vector u is the same as that of (e + [u m]), the component of m′ is the same
as that of m - [u e], but for the perpendicular direction ū, the components of
e′, m′ are the same as those of (e + [u m]) and (m - [u e], multiplied by 1/√(1
- u²). On the other hand E′ and M′ shall stand to E + [uM], and M - [uE] in

the same relation as e′ and m′ to e + [um], and m - (ue). From the relation e′
= εE′, the following equations follow

(C) e + [um] = ε(E + [uM]),

and from the relation M′ = μm′, we have

(D) M - [u E] = μ(m - [ue]),

For the components in the directions perpendicular to u, and to each other,
the equations are to be multiplied by √(1 - u²).
Then the following equations follow from the transformation? equations
(12), (10), (11) in § 4, when we replace q, rv, rṽ, t, r′v, r′ṽ, t’ by |u|, Cu, Cū, ρ,
C′u, C′ū, ρ′

ρ′ = (-|u| Cu + ρ)/√(1 - u²),
C’u = (Cu - |u|ρ)/√(1 - u²),
C′ū = Cū,

E) (Cu - |u|ρ)/√(1 - u²) = σ(E + [uM])u,

Cū = σ (E + [uM])u/√(1 - u²).

In consideration of the manner in which σ enters into these relations, it will
be convenient to call the vector C - ρu with the components Cu - ρ|u| in the
direction of u, and C′ū in the directions ū perpendicular to u the
“Convection current.” This last vanishes for σ = 0.
We remark that for ε = 1, μ = 1 the equations e′ = E′, m′ = M′ immediately
lead to the equations e = E, m = M by means of a reciprocal Lorentz-
transformation with -u as vector; and for σ = 0, the equation C′ = 0 leads to
C = ρu; that the fundamental equations of Äther discussed in § 2 becomes
in fact the limitting case of the equations obtained here with ε = 1, μ = 1, σ
= 0.

§ 9. The Fundamental Equations in Lorentz’s Theory.

Let us now see how far the fundamental equations assumed by Lorentz
correspond to the Relativity postulate, as defined in §8. In the article on
Electron-theory (Ency., Math., Wiss., Bd. V. 2, Art 14) Lorentz has given
the fundamental equations for any possible, even magnetised bodies (see
there page 209, Eqn XXX′, formula (14) on page 78 of the same (part).

(IIIa″) Curl (H - [uE]) = J + dD/dt + u div D
- curl [uD].

(I″) div D = ρ

(IV″) curl E = - dB/dt, Div B = 0 (V′)

Then for moving non-magnetised bodies, Lorentz puts (page 223, 3) μ = 1,
B = H, and in addition to that takes account of the occurrence of the di-
electric constant ε, and conductivity σ according to equations

(εqXXXIV″, p. 327) D - E = (ε - 1) {E + [uB]}

(εqXXXIII′, p. 223) J = σ(E + [uB])

Lorentz’s E, D, H are here denoted by E, M, e, m while J denotes the
conduction current.
The three last equations which have been just cited here coincide with eqn
(II), (III), (IV), the first equation would be, if J is identified with C, = uρ
(the current being zero for σ = 0,

(29) Curl [H - (u, E)] = C + dD/dt - curl [uD],

and thus comes out to be in a different form than (1) here. Therefore for
magnetised bodies, Lorentz’s equations do not correspond to the Relativity
Principle.
On the other hand, the form corresponding to the relativity principle, for the
condition of non-magnetisation is to be taken out of (D) in §8, with μ = 1,
not as B = H, as Lorentz takes, but as (30) B - [uD] = H - [uD] (M - [uE] =
m - [ue]. Now by putting H = B, the differential equation (29) is
transformed into the same form as eqn (1) here when m - [ue] = M - [uE].
Therefore it so happens that by a compensation of two contradictions to the
relativity principle, the differential equations of Lorentz for moving non-
magnetised bodies at last agree with the relativity postulate.
If we make use of (30) for non-magnetic bodies, and put accordingly H = B
+ [u, (D - E)], then in consequence of (C) in §8,

(ε - 1) (E + [u, B]) = D - E + [u. [u, D - E]],

i.e. for the direction of u,

(ε - 1) (E + [uB])u = (D - E)u

and for a perpendicular direction ū,

(ε - 1) [E + (uB)]u = (1 - u²) (D - E)u

i.e. it coincides with Lorentz’s assumption, if we neglect u² in comparison
to 1.
Also to the same order of approximation, Lorentz’s form for J corresponds
to the conditions imposed by the relativity principle [comp. (E) § 8]—that
the components of Ju, Jū are equal to the components of σ (E + [u B])
multiplied by √(1 - u²) or 1 / √(1 - u²) respectively.

§10. Fundamental Equations of E. Cohn.

E. Cohn assumes the following fundamental equations.

(31) Curl (M + [u E]) = dE/dt + u div. E + J

- Curl [E - (u. M)] = dM/dt + u div. M.

(32) J = σ E, = ε E - [u M], M = μ (m + [u E.])

where E M are the electric and magnetic field intensities (forces), E, M are
the electric and magnetic polarisation (induction). The equations also permit
the existence of true magnetism; if we do not take into account this
consideration, div. M. is to be put = 0.
An objection to this system of equations, is that according to these, for ε =
1, μ = 1, the vectors force and induction do not coincide. If in the equations,
we conceive E and M and not E - (U. M), and M + [U E] as electric and
magnetic forces, and with a glance to this we substitute for E, M, E, M, div.
E, the symbols e, M, E + [U M], m - [u e], ρ, then the differential equations
transform to our equations, and the conditions (32) transform into

J = σ(E + [u M])
e + [u, (m - [u e])] = ε(E + [u M])
M - [u, (E + u M)] = μ(m - [u e])

then in fact the equations of Cohn become the same as those required by the
relativity principle, if errors of the order u² are neglected in comparison to
1.
It may be mentioned here that the equations of Hertz become the same as
those of Cohn, if the auxiliary conditions are

(33) E = εE, M = μM, J = σE.

§11. Typical Representations of the Fundamental Equations.

In the statement of the fundamental equations, our leading idea had been
that they should retain a covariance of form, when subjected to a group of
Lorentz-transformations. Now we have to deal with ponderomotive
reactions and energy in the electro-magnetic field. Here from the very first
there can be no doubt that the settlement of this question is in some way
connected with the simplest forms which can be given to the fundamental
equations, satisfying the conditions of covariance. In order to arrive at such
forms, I shall first of all put the fundamental equations in a typical form
which brings out clearly their covariance in case of a Lorentz-
transformation. Here I am using a method of calculation, which enables us
to deal in a simple manner with the space-time vectors of the 1st, and 2nd
kind, and of which the rules, as far as required are given below.
A system of magnitudes ah k formed into the matrix

| a₁₁.......a1 q |
| |
| |
| |
| ap 1.....ap q |

arranged in p horizontal rows, and q vertical columns is called a p × q
series-matrix, and will be denoted by the letter A.
If all the quantities ah k are multiplied by C, the resulting matrix will be
denoted by CA.
If the roles of the horizontal rows and vertical columns be intercharged, we
obtain a q × p series matrix, which will be known as the transposed matrix
of A, and will be denoted by Ā.

Ā = | a₁₁ ...... ap 1 |
| |
| a1 q ...... ap q |

If we have a second p × q series matrix B,

B = | b₁₁ .......... b₁q |
| |
| bp 1 .......... bp q |

then A + B shall denote the p × q series matrix whose members are ah k + bh
k.

2⁰ If we have two matrices

A = | a₁₁ .......... a₁q |
| |
| ap 1 .......... ap q |

B = | b₁₁ .......... b₁r |
| |
| bq 1 .......... bp r |

where the number of horizontal rows of B, is equal to the number of vertical
columns of A, then by AB, the product of the matrices A and B, will be
denoted the matrix

C = | c₁₁ .......... c₁r |
| |
| cpr .......... cp p |

where ch k = ah 1 b₁k + ah 2 b2 h + ... ak s bs k + ... + ak q bq h

these elements being formed by combination of the horizontal rows of A
with the vertical columns of B. For such a point, the associative law (AB)S
= A(BS) holds, where S is a third matrix which has got as many horizontal
rows as B (or AB) has got vertical columns.
For the transposed matrix of C = BA, we have Ċ = ḂĀ
3⁰. We shall have principally to deal with matrices with at most four vertical
columns and for horizontal rows.
As a unit matrix (in equations they will be known for the sake of shortness
as the matrix 1) will be denoted the following matrix (4 × 4 series) with the
elements.

(34) | e₁₁ e₁₂ e₁₃ e₁₄ | = | 1 0 0 0 |
| e₂₁ e₂₂ e₂₃ e₂₄ | | 0 1 0 0 |
| e₃₁ e₃₂ e₃₃ e₃₄ | | 0 0 1 0 |
| e₄₁ e₄₂ e₄₃ e₄₄ | | 0 0 0 1 |

For a 4 × 4 series-matrix, Det A shall denote the determinant formed of the
4 × 4 elements of the matrix. If det A ≠ 0, then corresponding to A there is a
reciprocal matrix, which we may denote by A⁻¹ so that A⁻¹A = 1.
A matrix

f = | 0 f₁₂ f₁₃ f₁₄ |
| f₂₁ 0 f₂₃ f₂₄ |
| f₃₁ f₃₂ 0 f₃₄ |
| f₄₁ f₄₂ f₄₃ 0 |

in which the elements fulfil the relation fh k = -fh k, is called an alternating
matrix. These relations say that the transposed matrix ḟ = -f. Then by f* will
be the dual, alternating matrix

(35)

f* = | 0 f₃₄ f₄₂ f₂₃ |
| f₄₃ 0 f₁₄ f₃₁ |
| f₂₄ f₄₁ 0 f₁₂ |
| f₃₂ f₁₃ f₂₁ 0 |

Then (36) f* f = f₃₄ f₂₂ + f₄₂ f₃₁ + f₃₂ f₂₄
i.e. We shall have a 4 × 4 series matrix in which all the elements except
those on the diagonal from left up to right down are zero, and the elements
in this diagonal agree with each other, and are each equal to the above
mentioned combination in (36).
The determinant of f is therefore the square of the combination, by Det½f we
shall denote the expression

Det½f
= f₃₂ f₁₄ f₁₃ f₂₄ + f₂₁ f₃₄·

4⁰. A linear transformation
xh = αh1 x₁′ + αh2 x₂′ + αh3 x₃′ + αh4 x₄′ (h = 1,2,3,
which is accomplished by the matrix

A = | α₁₁, α₁₂, α₁₃, α₁₄ |
| |
| α₂₁, α₂₂, α₂₃, α₂₄ |
| |
| α₃₁, α₃₂, α₃₃, α₃₄ |
| |
| α₄₁, α₄₂, α₄₃, α₄₄ |

will be denoted as the transformation A.
By the transformation A, the expression

x²₁ + x²₂ + x²₃ + x²₄ is changed into the quadratic for m ∑ αhk xh′ xk′,
where αhk = α1k α1k + α2h α2k + α3h α3k + α4h α4k are the members of a 4 × 4
series matrix which is the product of Ā A, the transposed matrix of A into A.
If by the transformation, the expression is changed to

x′₁² + x₂′2 + x₃′2 + x′₄²,

we must have Ā A = 1.
A has to correspond to the following relation, if transformation (38) is to be
a Lorentz-transformation. For the determinant of A) it follows out of (39)
that (Det A)² = 1, or Det A = ± 1.
From the condition (39) we obtain

A⁻¹ = Ā,

i.e. the reciprocal matrix of A is equivalent to the transposed matrix of A.
For A as Lorentz transformation, we have further Det A = +1, the quantities
involving the index 4 once in the subscript are purely imaginary, the other
co-efficients are real, and a₄₄ > 0.

[21]
5⁰. A space time vector of the first kind which s represented by the 1 × 4
series matrix,

(41) s = |s₁ s₂ s₃ s₄|

is to be replaced by sA in case of a Lorentz transformation

A. i.e. s′ = | s₁′ s₂′ s₃′ s₄′| = |s₁ s₂ s₃ s₄| A;

A space-time vector of the 2nd kind[22] with components f₂₃ ... f₃₄ shall be
represented by the alternating matrix

(42) f = | 0 f₁₂ f₁₃ f₁₄ |

|f₂₁ 0 f₂₃ f₂₄ |

|f₃₁ f₃₂ 0 f₃₄ |

|f₄₁ f₄₂ f₄₃ 0 |

and is to be replaced by A⁻¹ f A in case of a Lorentz transformation [see the
rules in § 5 (23) (24)]. Therefore referring to the expression (37), we have
the identity Det½ (Ā f A) = Det A. Det½ f. Therefore Det½ f becomes an
invariant in the case of a Lorentz transformation [see eq. (26) See. § 5].
Looking back to (36), we have for the dual matrix (Āf*A) (A⁻¹fA) =
½ ½
A⁻¹f*fA = Det function. A⁻¹A = Det f from which it is to be seen that the
dual matrix f* behaves exactly like the primary matrix f, and is therefore a
space time vector of the II kind; f* is therefore known as the dual space-
time vector of f with components (f₁₄, f₂₄, f₃₄,), (f₂₃}, f₃₁, f₁₂).
6. If w and s are two space-time rectors of the 1st kind then by w ṡ (as well
as by s ẇ) will be understood the combination (43) w₁ s₁ + w₂ s₂ + w₃ s₃ +
w₄ s₄.
In case of a Lorentz transformation A, since (wA) (Āṡ) = w s, this
expression is invariant.—If w ṡ = 0, then w and s are perpendicular to each
other.
Two space-time rectors of the first kind (w, s) gives us a 2 × 4 series matrix

| w₁ w₂ w₃ w₄ |
| s₁ s₂ s₃ s₄ |

Then it follows immediately that the system of six magnitudes (44)

w₂ s₃ - w₃ s₂,
w₃ s₁ - w₁ s₃,
w₁ s₂ - w₂ s₁,
w₁ s₄ - w₄ s₁,
w₂ s₄ - w₄ s₂,
w₃ s₄ - w₄ s₃,

behaves in case of a Lorentz-transformation as a space-time vector of the II
kind. The vector of the second kind with the components (44) are denoted
by [w, s]. We see easily that Det½ [w, s] = 0. The dual vector of [w, s] shall
be written as [w, s].
If ẇ is a space-time vector of the 1st kind, f of the second kind, w f signifies
a 1 × 4 series matrix. In case of a Lorentz-transformation A, w is changed
into w′ = wA, f into f′ = A⁻¹ f A,—therefore w′ f′ becomes = (wA A⁻¹ f A) =
w f A i.e. w f is transformed as a space-time vector of the 1st kind.[23] We can
verify, when w is a space-time vector of the 1st kind, f of the 2nd kind, the
important identity

(45) [w, wf] + [w, wf*]* = (w] ẇ)f.

The sum of the two space time vectors of the second kind on the left side is
to be understood in the sense of the addition of two alternating matrices.
For example, for ω₁ = 0, ω₂ = 0, ω₃ = 0, ω₄ = i,

ωf = | if₄₁, if₄₂, if₄₃, 0 |;
ωf* = | if₃₂, if₁₃, if₂₁, 0 |

[ω · ωf] = 0, 0, 0, f₄₁, f₄₂, f₄₃;
[ω · ωf*]* = 0, 0, 0, f₃₂, f₁₃, f₂₁.

The fact that in this special case, the relation is satisfied, suffices to
establish the theorem (45) generally, for this relation has a covariant
character in case of a Lorentz transformation, and is homogeneous in (ω₁,
ω₂, ω₃, ω₄).

After these preparatory works let us engage ourselves with the equations
(C,) (D,) (E) by means which the constants ε μ, σ will be introduced.
Instead of the space vector u, the velocity of matter, we shall introduce the
space-time vector of the first kind ω with the components.

ω₁ = ux/√(1 - u²),
ω₂ = uy/√(1 - u²),
ω₃ = uz/√(1 - u²),
ω₄ = i/√(1 - u²).

(40) where ω₁² + ω₂² + ω₃² + ω₄² = -1 and -iω₄ > 0.
By F and f shall be understood the space time vectors of the second kind M
- iE, m - ie.
In Φ = ωF, we have a space time vector of the first kind with components

Φ₁ = ω₂F₁₂ + ω₃F₁₃ + ω₄F₁₄

Φ₂ = ω₁F₂₁ + ω₃F₂₃ + ω₄F₂₄

Φ₃ = ω₁F₃₁ + ω₂F₃₂ + ω₄F₃₄

Φ₄ = ω₁F₄₁ + ω₂F₄₂ + ω₃F₄₃

The first three quantities (φ₁, φ₂, φ₃) are the components of the space-vector
(E + [u, M])/√(1 - u²),
and further (φ₄ = i[u E]/√(1 - u²).
Because F is an alternating matrix,

(49) ωΦ = ω₁ φ₁ + ω₂ Φ₂ + ω₃ Φ₃ + ω₄ Φ₄ = 0.

i.e. Φ is perpendicular to the vector ω; we can also write Φ₄ = i[ωx Φ₁ + ωy
Φ₂ + ωz Φ₃].

I shall call the space-time vector Φ of the first kind as the Electric Rest
Force.[24]
Relations analogous to those holding between -ωF, E, M, U, hold amongst
-ωf, e, m, u, and in particular -ωf is normal to ω. The relation (C) can be
written as

{C} ωf = εωF.

The expression (ωf) gives four components, but the fourth can be derived
from the first three.
Let us now form the time-space vector 1st kind, ψ - iωf*, whose
components are

ψ₁ = -i(ω₂ f₃₄ + ω₃ f₄₂ + ω₄ f₂₃)
ψ₂ = -i(ω₁ f₄₃ + ω₃ f₄₄ + ω₄ f₃₁)
ψ₃ = -i(ω₁ f₂₄ + ω₂ f₄₁ + ω₄ f₁₂)
ψ₄ = -i(ω₁ f₃₂ + ω₂ f₁₃ + ω₃ f₂₁)

Of these, the first three ψ₁, ψ₂, ψ₃, are the x, y, z components of the space-
vector 51) (m - (ue))/√(1 - u²) and further (52) ψ₄ = i(um)/√(1 - u²).
Among these there is the relation

(53) ωψ = ω₁ ψ₁ + ω₂ ψ₂ + ω₃ ψ₃ + ω₄ ψ₄ = 0

which can also be written as ψ₄ = i (ux ψ₁ + uy ψ₂ + uz ψ₃).
The vector ψ is perpendicular to ω; we can call it the Magnetic rest-force.
Relations analogous to these hold among the quantities ωF*, M, E, u and
Relation (D) can be replaced by the formula

{ D } -ωF* = μψf*.

We can use the relations (C) and (D) to calculate F and f from Φ and ψ we
have

ωF = -Φ, ωF* = -iμψ, ωf = -εΦ, ωf* = -iψ.

and applying the relation (45) and (46), we have

F = [ω. Φ] + iμ[ω. ψ]* 55)
f = ε[ω. Φ] + i[ω. ψ]* 56)

i.e.

F₁₂ = (ω₁ Φ₁ - ω₂ Φ₁) + iμ [ω₃ Ψ₄ - ω₄ ψ₃], etc.
f₁₂ = ε(ω₁ Φ₂ - ω₂ φ₁) + i [ω₃ ψ₄ - ω₄ ψ₃]., etc.

Let us now consider the space-time vector of the second kind [Φ ψ], with
the components

[ Φ₂ ψ₃ - Φ₃ ψ₂, Φ₃ ψ₁ - Φ₁ ψ₃, Φ₁ ψ₂ - Φ₂ ψ₁ ]
[ Φ₁ ψ₄ - Φ₄ ψ₁, Φ₂ ψ₄ - Φ₄ ψ₂, Φ₃ ψ₄ - Φ₄ ψ₃ ]

Then the corresponding space-time vector of the first kind ω[Φ, ψ] vanishes
identically owing to equations 9) and 53)

for ω[Φ.ψ] = -(ωψ)Φ + (ωΦ)ψ

Let us now take the vector of the 1st kind

(57) Ω = iω[Φψ]*

with the components

Ω₁ = -i | ω₂ ω₃ ω₄ |
| Φ₂ Φ₃ Φ₄ |
| ψ₂ ψ₃ ψ₄ |, etc.

Then by applying rule (45), we have

(58) [Φ.ψ] = i[ωΩ]*

i.e. Φ₁ψ₂ - Φ₂ψ₁ = i(ω₃Ω₄ - ω₄Ω₃) etc.
The vector Ω fulfils the relation

(ωΩ) = ω₁Ω₁ + ω₂Ω₂ + ω₃Ω₃ + ω₄Ω₄ = 0,

(which we can write as Ω₄ = i(ωxΩ₁ + ωyΩ₂ + ωzΩ₃) and Ω is also normal
to ω. In case ω = 0, we have Φ₄ = 0, ψ₄ = 0, Ω₄ = 0, and

[Ω₁, Ω₂, Ω₃ = | Φ₁ Φ₂ Φ₃ |
| ψ₁ ψ₂ ψ₃ |.

I shall call Ω, which is a space-time vector 1st kind the Rest-Ray.
As for the relation E), which introduces the conductivity σ we have -ωS = -
(ω₁s₁ + ω₂s₂ + ω₃s₃ + ω₄s₄) = (- | u | Cu + ρ)/√(1 - u²) = ρ′.
This expression gives us the rest-density of electricity (see §8 and §4).
Then 61) = s + (ωṡ)ω represents a space-time vector of the 1st kind, which
since ωω = -1, is normal to ω, and which I may call the rest-current. Let us
now conceive of the first three component of this vector as the (x-y-z) co-
ordinates of the space-vector, then the component in the direction of u is

Cu - (| u | ρ′)/√(1 - u²)
= (cu - | u |ρ)/√(1 - u²)
= Ju/(1 - u²)

and the component in a perpendicular direction is Cu = Jū.
This space-vector is connected with the space-vector J = C - ρu, which we
denoted in §8 as the conduction-current.
Now by comparing with Φ = -ωF, the relation (E) can be brought into the
form

{E} s + (ωṡ)ω = - σωF,

This formula contains four equations, of which the fourth follows from the
first three, since this is a space-time vector which is perpendicular to ω.
Lastly, we shall transform the differential equations (A) and (B) into a
typical form.

§12. The Differential Operator Lor.

A 4 × 4 series matrix 62) S = | S₁₁ S₁₂ S₁₃ S₁₄ | = | Skh |
| S₂₁ S₂₂ S₂₃ S₂₄ |
| S₃₁ S₃₂ S₃₃ S₃₄ |
| S₄₁ S₄₂ S₄₃ S₄₄ |

with the condition that in case of a Lorentz transformation it is to be
replaced by ĀSA, may be called a space-time matrix of the II kind. We have
examples of this in:—
1) the alternating matrix f, which corresponds to the space-time vector of
the II kind,—
2) the product fF of two such matrices, for by a transformation A, it is
replaced by (A⁻¹fA·A⁻¹FA) = A⁻¹fFA,
3) further when (ω₁, ω₂, ω₃, ω₄) and (Ω₁, Ω₂, Ω₃, Ω₄) are two space-time
vectors of the 1st kind, the 4 × 4 matrix with the element Shk = ωhΩk,
lastly in a multiple L of the unit matrix of 4 × 4 series in which all the
elements in the principal diagonal are equal to L, and the rest are zero.
We shall have to do constantly with functions of the space-time point (x, y,
z, it), and we may with advantage
employ the 1 × 4 series matrix, formed of differential symbols,—

| ∂/∂x, ∂/∂y, ∂/∂z, ∂/i∂t,|
or (63) | ∂/∂x₁ ∂/∂x₂ ∂/∂x₃ ∂/∂x₄ |

For this matrix I shall use the shortened from “lor.”[25]
Then if S is, as in (62), a space-time matrix of the II kind, by lor S′ will be
understood the 1 × 4 series matrix

| K₁ K₂ K₃ K₄ |

where Kk = ∂S1k/∂x₁ + ∂S2k/∂x₂ + ∂S3k/∂x₃ + ∂S4h/∂x₄.
When by a Lorentz transformation A, a new reference system (x′₁ x′₂ x′₃ x₄)
is introduced, we can use the operator

lor′ = | ∂/∂x₁′ ∂/∂x₂′ ∂/∂x₃′ ∂/∂x₄′ |

Then S is transformed to S′= Ā S A = | S′hk |, so by lor 'S′ is meant the 1 × 4
series matrix, whose element are

K’k = ∂S′1k/∂x₁′ + ∂S′2k/∂x₂′
+ ∂S′3k/∂x₃′ + ∂S′4k/∂x₄′.

Now for the differentiation of any function of (x y z t) we have the rule ∂/
∂xk′ = ∂/∂x₁ ∂x₁/∂xk′ + ∂/∂x₂ ∂x₂/∂xk′ + ∂/∂x₃ ∂x₃/∂xk′ + ∂/∂x₄ ∂x₄/∂xk′ = ∂/∂x₁
a1k + ∂/∂x₂ a2k + ∂/∂x₃ a3k + ∂/∂x₄ a4k.
so that, we have symbolically lor′ = lor A.
Therefore it follows that

lor ′S′ = lor (A A⁻¹ SA) = (lor S)A.

i.e., lor S behaves like a space-time vector of the first kind.
If L is a multiple of the unit matrix, then by lor L will be denoted the matrix
with the elements

| ∂L/∂x₁ ∂L/∂x₂ ∂L/∂x₃ ∂L/∂x₄ |

If s is a space-time vector of the 1st kind, then

lor ṡ = ∂s₁/∂x₁ + ∂s₂/∂x₂ + ∂s₃/∂x₃ + ∂s₄/∂x₄.

In case of a Lorentz transformation A, we have

lor ′ṡ′ = lor A. Ās = lor s.

i.e., lor s is an invariant in a Lorentz-transformation.
In all these operations the operator lor plays the part of a space-time vector
of the first kind.
If f represents a space-time vector of the second kind,—lor f denotes a
space-time vector of the first kind with the components

∂f₁₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₁₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₁₄/∂x₄,
∂f₂₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₂₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₂₄/∂x₄,
∂f₃₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₃₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₃₄/∂x₄,
∂f₄₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₄₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₄₃/∂x₃

So the system of differential equations (A) can be expressed in the concise
form

{A} lor f = -s,

and the system (B) can be expressed in the form

{B} log F* = 0.

Referring back to the definition (67) for log ṡ, we find that the combinations
lor ([=(lor f)=]), and lor ([=(lor F*)]) vanish identically, when f and F* are
alternating matrices. Accordingly it follows out of {A}, that

(68) (∂s₁/∂x₁) + (∂s₂/∂x₂) + (∂s₃/∂x₃) + (∂s₄/∂x₄) = 0,

while the relation

(69) lor (lor F*) = 0,

signifies that of the four equations in {B}, only three represent independent
conditions.
I shall now collect the results.
Let ω denote the space-time vector of the first kind

(u/√(1 - u²}), i/√(1 - u²))

(u = velocity of matter),

F the space-time vector of the second kind (M,-iE)
(M = magnetic induction, E = Electric force,
f the space-time vector of the second kind (m,-ie)
(m = magnetic force, e = Electric Induction.
s the space-time vector of the first kind (C, iρ)
(ρ = electrical space-density, C - ρu = conductivity current,
ε = dielectric constant, μ = magnetic permeability,
σ = conductivity,
then the fundamental equations for electromagnetic processes in moving
bodies are[26]

{A} lor f = -s

{B} log F* = 0

{C} ωf = εωF

{D} ωF* = μωf*

{E} s + (ωṡ), w = - σωF.

ω ῶ = -1, and ωF, ωf, ωF*, ωf*, s + (ωs)ω which are space-time vectors of
the first kind are all normal to ω, and for the system {B}, we have

lor (lor F*) = 0.

Bearing in mind this last relation, we see that we have as many independent
equations at our disposal as are necessary for determining the motion of
matter as well as the vector u as a function of x, y, z, t, when proper
fundamental data are given.

§ 13. The Product of the Field-vectors f F.

Finally let us enquire about the laws which lead to the determination of the
vector ω as a function of (x, y, z, t.) In these investigations, the expressions
which are obtained by the multiplication of two alternating matrices

f = | 0 f₁₂ f₁₃ f₁₄ |
| f₂₁ 0 f₂₃ f₂₄ |
| f₃₁ f₃₂ 0 f₃₄ |
| f₄₁ f₄₂ f₄₃ 0 |

F = | 0 F₁₂ F₁₃ F₁₄ |
| F₂₁ 0 F₂₃ F₂₄ |
| F₃₁ F₃₂ 0 F₃₄ |
| F₄₁ F₄₂ F₄₃ 0 |

are of much importance. Let us write,

(70) fF =| S₁₁ - L S₁₂ S₁₃ S₁₄ |

| S₂₁ S₂₂ - L S₂₃ S₂₄ |

| S₃₁ S₃₂ S₃₃ - L S₃₄ |

| S₄₁ S₄₂ S₄₃ S₄₄ - L |

Then (71) S₁₁ + S₂₂ + S₃₃ + S₄₄ = 0.
Let L now denote the symmetrical combination of the indices 1, 2, 3, 4,
given by

(72) L = ½(f₂₃ F₂₃ + f₃₁F₃₁ + f₁₂ + F₁₂ + f₁₄ F₁₄
+ f₂₄ F₂₄ + f₃₄ F₃₄)

Then we shall have

(73) S₁₁ = ½(f₂₃ F₂₃ + f₃₄ F₃₄ + f₄₂ F₄₂ - f₁₂ F₁₂
- f₁₃ F₁₃ f₁₄ F₁₄)

S₁₂ = f₁₃ F₃₂ + f₁₄ F₄₂ etc....

In order to express in a real form, we write

(74) S = | S₁₁ S₁₂ S₁₃ S₁₄ |

| S₂₁ S₂₂ S₂₃ S₂₄ |

| S₃₁ S₃₂ S₃₃ S₃₄ |

| S₄₁ S₄₂ S₄₃ S₄₄ |

= | Xx Yx Zx -iTx |

| Xy Yy Zy -iTy |

| Xz Yz Zz -iTz |

| -iXt -iYt -iZt Tt |

Now Xx = ½[mxMx - myMy - mzMz + exEx - eyEy - ezEz]
so

(75) Xy = mxMy + eyEx, Yx = myMx + exEy etc.

Xt = eyMz - ezMy, Tx = mxEy - myEz, etc.

Tt = ½[mxMx + myMy + mzMz + exEx + eyEy + ezEz]

Lt = ½[mxMx + myMy + mzMz - exEx - eyEy - ezEz]

These quantities[27] are all real. In the theory for bodies at rest, the
combinations (Xx, Xy, Xz, Yz, Yy, Yz, Zx, Zy, Zz) are known as “Maxwell’s
Stresses,” Tx, Ty, Tz are known as the Poynting’s Vector, Tt as the
electromagnetic energy-density, and L as the Langrangian function.
On the other hand, by multiplying the alternating matrices of f* and F*, we
obtain

(77) F*f* =| -S₁₁ - L, -S₁₂, -S₁₃. -S₁₄ |

| -S₂₁, -S₂₂ - L, -S₂₃, -S₂₄ |

| -S₃₁ -S₃₂, -S₃₃ - L, -S₃₄ |

| -S₄₁ -S₄₂ -S₄₃ -S₄₄ - L |

and hence, we can put

(78) fF = S - L, F*f* = -S - L,

where by L, we mean L-times the unit matrix, i.e. the matrix with elements

| Lehk |, (ehh = 1, ehk = 0, h ≠ k h, k = 1, 2, 3, 4).

Since here SL = LS, we deduce that,

F*f*fF = (-S - L)(S - L) = -SS + L²,

and find, since f*f = Det½f, F*F = Det½F, we arrive at the interesting
conclusion

(79) SS = L² - Det½f Det½F

i.e. the product of the matrix S into itself can be expressed as the multiple of
a unit matrix—a matrix in which all the elements except those in the
principal diagonal are zero, the elements in the principal diagonal are all
equal and have the value given on the right-hand side of (79). Therefore the
general relations

(80) Sh1 S1k + Sh2 S2k + Sh3 S3k + Sh4 S4k = 0,

h, k being unequal indices in the series 1, 2, 3, 4, and

(81) Sh1 S1h + Sh2 S2h + Sh3 S3h + S{h4} S4h = L² -
Det½f Det½F,

for h = 1, 2, 3, 4.
Now if instead of F, and f in the combinations (72) and (73), we introduce
the electrical rest-force Φ, the magnetic rest-force ψ, and the rest-ray Ω
[(55), (56) and (57)], we can pass over to the expressions,—

(82) L = - ½ ε Φ [=Φ] + ½ μ ψ [=ψ],

(83) Shk = - ½ ε Φ [=Φ] ehk - ½ μ ψ [=ψ] ehk
+ ε (Φh Φk - Φ ([=Φ]) ωh Ωk
+ μ (ψh ψk - Ψ [=ψ] Ω{h} ωk) - ωh ωk - εμ ωh Ωk
(h₁ k = 1, 2, 3, 4).

Here we have

Φ [=Φ] = Φ₁² + Φ₂² + Φ₃² + Φ₄², ψ[=ψ] = ψ₁² + ψ₂² + ψ₃² + ψ₄²

ehh = 1, ehk = 0 (h ≠ k).

The right side of (82) as well as L is an invariant in a Lorentz
transformation, and the 4 × 4 element on the right side of (83) as well as Sk

h represent a space time vector of the second kind. Remembering this fact, it
suffices, for establishing the theorems (82) and (83) generally, to prove it
for the special case ω₁ = 0, ω₂ = 0, ω₃ = 0, ω₄ = i. But for this case ω = 0,
we immediately arrive at the equations (82) and (83) by means (45), (51),
(60) on the one hand, and e = εE, M = μm on the other hand.
The expression on the right-hand side of (81), which equals

[½ (m M - eE)²] + (em) (EM),

is >= 0, because (em = ε Φ [=ψ], (EM) = μ Φ [=ψ]; now referring back to
79), we can denote the positive square root of this expression as Det1/4 S.
Since ḟ = -f, and Ḟ = -F, we obtain for Ṡ, the transposed matrix of S, the
following relations from (78),

(84) Ff = Ṡ - L, f* F* = -Ṡ - L,

Then is

Ṡ - S = | Sh k - S t k |

an alternating matrix, and denotes a space-time vector of the second kind.
From the expressions (83), we obtain,

(85) S - Ṡ = - (εμ - 1) [ω, Ω],

from which we deduce that [see (57), (58)].

(86) ω (S - Ṡ)* = 0,

(87) ω (S - Ṡ) = (εμ - 1) Ω

When the matter is at rest at a space-time point, ω = 0, then the equation 86)
denotes the existence of the following equations

Zy = Y z , X z = Z x , Yx = X y ,

and from 83),

Tx = Ω₁, Ty = Ω₂, Tz = Ω₃

Xt = εμΩ₁, Yt = εμΩ₂, Zt = εμΩ₃

Now by means of a rotation of the space co-ordinate system round the null-
point, we can make,

Zy = Yz = 0, Xz = Zx = 0, Xx = Xy = 0,

According to 71), we have

(88) Xx + Yy + Zz + Tt = 0,

and according to 83), Tt > 0. In special cases, where ω vanishes it follows
from 81) that

Xx² = Yy² = Zz² = Tt², = (Det1/4 S)²,

and if T, and one of the three magnitudes Xx, Yy, Zz are = ±Det1/4 S, the two
others = -Det1/4 S. If Ω does not vanish let Ω ≠ 0, then we have in particular
from 80)

Tz Xt = 0, Tz Yt = 0, Zz Tz + Tz Tt = 0,

and if Ω₁ = 0, Ω₂ = 0, Zz = -Tt It follows from (81), (see also 83) that

Xx = -Yy = ±Det1/4 S,

and -Zz = Tt = √(Det½ S + εμΩ₃²) > Det1/4S.
The space-time vector of the first kind

(89) K = lor S,

is of very great importance for which we now want to demonstrate a very
important transformation
According to 78), S = L + fF, and it follows that

lor S = lor L + lor fF.

The symbol ‘lor’ denotes a differential process which in lor fF, operates on
the one hand upon the components of f, on the other hand also upon the
components of F. Accordingly lor fF can be expressed as the sum of two
parts. The first part is the product of the matrices (lor f) F, lor f being
regarded as a 1 × 4 series matrix. The second part is that part of lor fF, in
which the diffentiations operate upon the components of F alone. From 78)
we obtain

fF = -F*f* - 2L;

hence the second part of lor fF = -(lor F*)f* + the part of -2 lor L, in which
the differentiations operate upon the components of F alone. We thus obtain

lor S = (lor f)F - (lor F*)f* + N,

where N is the vector with the components

Nh = ½(∂f₂₃/∂xh F₂₃ + ∂f₃₁/∂xh F₃₁ + ∂f₁₂/∂xh F₁₂ + ∂f₁₄/∂xh F₁₄
+ ∂f₂₄/∂xh F₂₄ + ∂f₃₄/∂xh F₃₄
- ∂F₂₃/∂xh f₂₃ - ∂F₃₁/∂xh f₃₁ - ∂F₁₂/∂xh f₁₂ - ∂F₁₄/∂xh f₁₄
- ∂F₂₄/∂xh f₂₄ - ∂F₃₄/∂xh f₃₄),

(h = 1, 2, 3, 4)

By using the fundamental relations A) and B), 90) is transformed into the
fundamental relation

(91) lor S = -sF + N.

In the limitting case ε = 1, μ = 1, f = F, N vanishes identically.
Now upon the basis of the equations (55) and (56), and referring back to the
expression (82) for L, and from 57) we obtain the following expressions as
components of N,—

(92) Nh = - ½ Φ[=Φ]∂ε/∂xh - ½ ψ[=ψ]∂μ/∂xh
+ (εμ - 1)(Ω₁ ∂ω₁/∂xh + Ω₂ ∂ω₂/∂xh + Ω₃ ∂ω₃/∂xh + Ω₄ ∂ω₄/∂xh)

for h = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Now if we make use of (59), and denote the space-vector which has Ω₁, Ω₂,
Ω₃ as the x, y, z components by the symbol W, then the third component of
92) can be expressed in the form

(93) (εμ - 1)/√(1 - u²) (W ∂u/∂xh),

The round bracket denoting the scalar product of the vectors within it.

§ 14. The Ponderomotive Force.[28]

Let us now write out the relation K = lor S = -sF + N in a more practical
form; we have the four equations

(94) K₁ = ∂Xx/∂x + ∂Xy/∂y + ∂Xy/∂z - ∂Xt/∂t = ρEx + syMz - szMx

- ½ Φ[=Φ] ∂ε/∂x - ½ ψ[=ψ]∂μ/∂x + (εμ - 1)/√(1 - u²) (W∂u/∂x),

(95) K₂ = ∂Yx/∂x + ∂Yy/∂y + ∂Yz/∂z - ∂Yt/∂t = ρEy + szMx - sxMy

- ½ Φ[=Φ]∂ε/∂y - ½ ψ[=ψ]∂μ/∂y + (εμ - 1)/√(1 - u²) (W∂u/∂y),

(96) K₃ = ∂Zx/∂x + ∂Zy/∂y + ∂Zz/∂z - ∂Zt/∂t = ρE₂ + sxMy - syM₄

- ½ Φ[=Φ] ∂ε/∂z - ½ ψ[=ψ] ∂μ/∂z + (εμ - 1)/√(1 - u²) (W∂u/∂z),

(97) (1/i)K₄ = ∂Ty/∂x - ∂Ty/∂y - ∂Tz/∂z - ∂Tt/∂t = sxEx + syEy + szEz

- ½ Φ[=Φ]∂ε/∂t - ½ ψ[=ψ]∂μ/∂t + (εμ - 1)/√(1 - u²) (W∂u/∂t).

It is my opinion that when we calculate the ponderomotive force which acts
upon a unit volume at the space-time point x, y, z, t, it has got, x, y, z
components as the first three components of the space-time vector

K + (ωK)ω,

This vector is perpendicular to ω; the law of Energy finds its expression in
the fourth relation.
The establishment of this opinion is reserved for a separate tract.
In the limiting case ε = 1, μ = 1, σ = 0, the vector N = 0, S = ρω, ωK = 0,
and we obtain the ordinary equations in the theory of electrons.

APPENDIX
Mechanics and the Relativity-Postulate.

It would be very unsatisfactory, if the new way of looking at the time-
concept, which permits a Lorentz transformation, were to be confined to a
single part of Physics.
Now many authors say that classical mechanics stand in opposition to the
relativity postulate, which is taken to be the basis of the new Electro-
dynamics.
In order to decide this let us fix our attention upon a special Lorentz
transformation represented by (10), (11), (12), with a vector v in any
direction and of any magnitude q < 1 but different from zero. For a moment
we shall not suppose any special relation to hold between the unit of length
and the unit of time, so that instead of t, t′, q, we shall write ct, ct′, and q/c,
where c represents a certain positive constant, and q is < c. The above
mentioned equations are transformed into

r′ṽ = rṽ,
r′v = c(rv - qt)/√(c² - q²),
t′ = (qrv + c²t)/c√(c² - q²)

They denote, as we remember, that r is the space-vector (x, y, z), r′ is the
space-vector (x′ y′ z′)
If in these equations, keeping v constant we approach the limit c = ∞, then
we obtain from these

r′ṽ = rṽ,
r′v = rv - qt,
t′ = t.

The new equations would now denote the transformation of a spatial co-
ordinate system (x, y, z) to another spatial co-ordinate system (x′ y′ z′) with
parallel axes, the null point of the second system moving with constant
velocity in a straight line, while the time parameter remains unchanged. We
can, therefore, say that classical mechanics postulates a covariance of
Physical laws for the group of homogeneous linear transformations of the
expression

-x² - y² - z² + c² (1)

when c = ∞.
Now it is rather confusing to find that in one branch of Physics, we shall
find a covariance of the laws for the transformation of expression (1) with a
finite value of c, in another part for c = ∞.
It is evident that according to Newtonian Mechanics, this covariance holds
for c = ∞ and not for c = velocity of light.
May we not then regard those traditional covariances for c = ∞ only as an
approximation consistent with experience, the actual covariance of natural
laws holding for a certain finite value of c.
I may here point out that by if instead of the Newtonian Relativity-Postulate
with c = ∞, we assume a relativity-postulate with a finite c, then the
axiomatic construction of Mechanics appears to gain considerably in
perfection.
The ratio of the time unit to the length unit is chosen in a manner so as to
make the velocity of light equivalent to unity.
While now I want to introduce geometrical figures in the manifold of the
variables (x, y, z, t), it may be convenient to leave (y, z) out of account, and
to treat x and t as any possible pair of co-ordinates in a plane, referred to
oblique axes.

A space time null point 0 (x, y, z, t = 0, 0, 0, 0) will be kept fixed in a
Lorentz transformation.

The figure -x² - y² - z² + t² = 1, t > 0 ... (2)

which represents a hyper boloidal shell, contains the space-time points A (x,
y, z, t = 0, 0, 0, 1), and all points A′ which after a Lorentz-transformation
enter into the newly introduced system of reference as (x′, y′, z′, t′ = 0, 0, 0,
1).
The direction of a radius vector 0A′ drawn from 0 to the point A′ of (2), and
the directions of the tangents to (2) at A′ are to be called normal to each
other.
Let us now follow a definite position of matter in its course through all time
t. The totality of the space-time points (x, y, z, t) which correspond to the
positions at different times t, shall be called a space-time line.
The task of determining the motion of matter is comprised in the following
problem:—It is required to establish for every space-time point the
direction of the space-time line passing through it.
To transform a space-time point P (x, y, z, t) to rest is equivalent to
introducing, by means of a Lorentz transformation, a new system of
reference (x′, y′, z′, t′), in which the t′ axis has the direction 0A′, 0A′
indicating the direction of the space-time line passing through P. The space
t′ = const, which is to be laid through P, is the one which is perpendicular to
the space-time line through P.
To the increment dt of the time of P corresponds the increment

dτ = √(dt² - dx² - dy²) - dz² = dt√(1 - u²)

of the newly introduced time parameter t′. The value of the integral

∫ dτ = ∫ √(-(dx₁² + dx₂² + dx₃² + dx₄²))

when calculated upon the space-time line from a fixed initial point P₀ to the
variable point P, (both being on the space-time line), is known as the
‘Proper-time’ of the position of matter we are concerned with at the space-
time point P. (It is a generalization of the idea of Positional-time which was
introduced by Lorentz for uniform motion.)
If we take a body R₀ which has got extension in space at time t₀, then the
region comprising all the space-time line passing through R₀ and t₀ shall be
called a space-time filament.
If we have an analytical expression θ(x y, z, t) so that θ(x, y z t) = 0 is
intersected by every space time line of the filament at one point,—whereby

-(∂Θ/∂x)², -(∂Θ/∂y)², -(∂Θ/∂z)²,
-(∂Θ/∂t)² > 0, ∂Θ/∂t > 0.

then the totality of the intersecting points will be called a cross section of
the filament.
At any point P of such across-section, we can introduce by means of a
Lorentz transformation a system of reference (x′, y, z′ t), so that according
to this

∂Θ/∂x′ = 0, ∂Θ/∂y′ = 0, ∂Θ/∂z′ = 0, ∂Θ/∂t′ > 0.

The direction of the uniquely determined t′—axis in question here is known
as the upper normal of the cross-section at the point P and the value of dJ =
∫∫∫ dx′ dy′ dz′ for the surrounding points of P on the cross-section is known
as the elementary contents (Inhalts-element) of the cross-section. In this
sense R₀ is to be regarded as the cross-section normal to the t axis of the
filament at the point t = t₀, and the volume of the body R₀ is to be regarded
as the contents of the cross-section.
If we allow R₀ to converge to a point, we come to the conception of an
infinitely thin space-time filament. In such a case, a space-time line will be
thought of as a principal line and by the term ‘Proper-time’ of the filament
will be understood the ‘Proper-time’ which is laid along this principal line;

under the term normal cross-section of the filament, we shall understand the
cross-section upon the space which is normal to the principal line through P.
We shall now formulate the principle of conservation of mass.
To every space R at a time t, belongs a positive quantity—the mass at R at
the time t. If R converges to a point (x, y, z, t), then the quotient of this
mass, and the volume of R approaches a limit μ(x, y, z, t), which is known
as the mass-density at the space-time point (x, y, z, t).
The principle of conservation of mass says—that for an infinitely thin
space-time filament, the product μdJ, where μ = mass-density at the point
(x, y, z, t) of the filament (i.e., the principal line of the filament), dJ =
contents of the cross-section normal to the t axis, and passing through (x, y,
z, t), is constant along the whole filament.
Now the contents dJn of the normal cross-section of the filament which is
laid through (x, y, z, t) is

(4) dJn = (1/√(1 - u²))dJ = -iω₄ dJ = (dt/dτ)dJ.

and the function

ν = μ/-iω₄ = μ√(1 - u²)) = μ(∂τ/∂t. (5)

may be defined as the rest-mass density at the position (x y z t). Then the
principle of conservation of mass can be formulated in this manner:—
For an infinitely thin space-time filament, the product of the rest-mass
density and the contents of the normal cross-section is constant along the
whole filament.
In any space-time filament, let us consider two cross-sections Q° and Q′,
which have only the points on the boundary common to each other; let the
space-time lines inside the filament have a larger value of t on Q′ than on
Q°. The finite range enclosed between Q° and Q′ shall be called a space-
time sichel,[29] Q′ is the lower boundary, and Q′ is the upper boundary of the
sichel.

If we decompose a filament into elementary space-time filaments, then to
an entrance-point of an elementary filament through the lower boundary of
the sichel, there corresponds an exit point of the same by the upper
boundary, whereby for both, the product νdJn taken in the sense of (4) and
(5), has got the same value. Therefore the difference of the two integrals
∫νdJn (the first being extended over the upper, the second upon the lower
boundary) vanishes. According to a well-known theorem of Integral
Calculus the difference is equivalent to

∫∫∫∫ lor ν[=ω] dx dy dz dt,

the integration being extended over the whole range of the sichel, and
(comp. (67), § 12)

lor ν[=ω] = (∂νω₁/∂x₁) + (∂νω₂/∂x₂) + (∂νω₃/∂x₃) + (∂νω₄/∂x₄).

If the sichel reduces to a point, then the differential equation

lor ν[=ω] = 0, (6)

which is the condition of continuity

(∂μux/∂x) + (∂μuy/∂y) + (∂μuz/∂z) + (∂μ/∂t) = 0.

Further let us form the integral

N = ∫ ∫∫∫ ν dx dy dz dt (7)

extending over the whole range of the space-time sichel. We shall
decompose the sichel into elementary space-time filaments, and every one
of these filaments in small elements dτ of its proper-time, which are
however large compared to the linear dimensions of the normal cross-

section; let us assume that the mass of such a filament νdJn = dm and write
l
τ⁰, τ for the ‘Proper-time’ of the upper and lower boundary of the sichel.
Then the integral (7) can be denoted by

∫∫ νdJn dτ = ∫ (τ′-τ⁰) dm.

taken over all the elements of the sichel.
Now let us conceive of the space-time lines inside a space-time sichel as
material curves composed of material points, and let us suppose that they
are subjected to a continual change of length inside the sichel in the
following manner. The entire curves are to be varied in any possible manner
inside the sichel, while the end points on the lower and upper boundaries
remain fixed, and the individual substantial points upon it are displaced in
such a manner that they always move forward normal to the curves. The
whole process may be analytically represented by means of a parameter λ,
and to the value λ = 0, shall correspond the actual curves inside the sichel.
Such a process may be called a virtual displacement in the sichel.
Let the point (x, y, z, t) in the sichel λ = 0 have the values x + δx, y + δy, z +
δz, t + δt, when the parameter has the value λ; these magnitudes are then
functions of (x, y, z, t, λ). Let us now conceive of an infinitely thin space-
time filament at the point (x y z t) with the normal section of contents dJn
and if dJn + δdJn be the contents of the normal section at the corresponding
position of the varied filament, then according to the principle of
conservation of mass—(ν + dν being the rest-mass-density at the varied
position),

(8) (ν + δν) (dJn + δdJn) = νdJn = dm.

In consequence of this condition, the integral (7) taken over the whole range
of the sichel, varies on account of the displacement as a definite function N
+ δN of λ, and we may call this function N + δN as the mass action of the
virtual displacement.
If we now introduce the method of writing with indices, we shall have

(9) d(xh + δxh) = dxh + ∑k ∂δxh/∂xk + ∂δxh/∂λ dλ

k = 1, 2, 3, 4
h = 1, 2, 3, 4

Now on the basis of the remarks already made, it is clear that the value of N
+ δN, when the value of the parameter is λ, will be:—

(10) N + δN = ∫∫∫∫ ((νd(τ + δτ))/dτ)dx dy dz dt,

the integration extending over the whole sichel d(τ + δτ) where d(τ + δτ)
denotes the magnitude, which is deduced from

√(-(dx₁ + dδx₁)² - (dx₂ + dδx₂)² - (dx₃ + dδx₃)² - (dx₄ + dδx₄)²)

by means of (9) and

dx₁ = ω₁ dτ, dx₂ = ω₂ dτ,
dx₃ = ω₃ dτ, dx₄ = ω₄ dτ, dλ = 0

therefore:—

(11) (d(τ + δτ))/dτ = √( -∑(ωh + ∑(∂δxh/∂xk)ωk)²)

k = 1, 2, 3, 4.
h = 1, 2, 3, 4.

We shall now subject the value of the differential quotient

(12) ((d(N + δN))/dλ) (λ = 0)

to a transformation. Since each δxh as a function of (x, y, z, t) vanishes for
the zero-value of the parameter λ, so in general dδxk/(∂xh = 0, for λ = 0.

Let us now put (∂δxh/∂λ) = ξh (h = 1, 2, 3, 4) (13)
λ=0
then on the basis of (10) and (11), we have the expression (12):—

= -∫∫∫∫ ∑ ωh((∂ξh/∂x₁)ω₁ + (∂ξh/∂x₂)ω₂ +(∂ξh/∂x₃)ω₃ + (∂ξh/∂x₄)ω₄)
dx dy dz dt

for the system (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄) on the boundary of the sichel, (δx₁ δx₂ δx₃ δx₄)
shall vanish for every value of λ and therefore ξ₁, ξ₂, ξ₃, ξ₄ are nil. Then by
partial integration, the integral is transformed into the form

∫∫∫∫ ∑ ξh(∂νωhω₁/∂x₁ + ∂νωhω₂/∂x₂ + ∂νωhω₃/∂x₃ + ∂νωhω₄/∂x₄)
dx dy dz dt

the expression within the bracket may be written as

= ωh ∑ ∂νωk/∂xk + ν∑ωk∂ωh/∂xk.

The first sum vanishes in consequence of the continuity equation (b). The
second may be written as

(∂ωh/∂x₁)(dx₁/dτ) + (∂ωh/∂x₂)(dx₂/dτ) + (∂ωh/∂x₃)(dx₃/dτ) + (∂ωh/∂x₄)
(dx₄/dτ)

= dωh/dτ = (d/dτ)(dxh/dτ)

whereby (d/dτ) is meant the differential quotient in the direction of the
space-time line at any position. For the differential quotient (12), we obtain
the final expression

(14) ∫∫∫∫ ν((∂ω₁/∂τ)ξ₁ + (∂ω₂/∂τ)ξ₂ + (∂ω₃/∂τ)ξ₃ + (∂ω₄/∂τ)ξ₄)

dx dy dz dt.

For a virtual displacement in the sichel we have postulated the condition
that the points supposed to be substantial shall advance normally to the
curves giving their actual motion, which is λ = 0; this condition denotes that
the ξh is to satisfy the condition

w₁ξ₁ + w₂ξ₂ + w₃ξ₃ + w₄ξ₄ = 0. (15)

Let us now turn our attention to the Maxwellian tensions in the
electrodynamics of stationary bodies, and let us consider the results in § 12
and 13; then we find that Hamilton’s Principle can be reconciled to the
relativity postulate for continuously extended elastic media.
At every space-time point (as in § 13), let a space time matrix of the 2nd
kind be known

(16) S =
| S₁₁ S₁₂ S₁₃ S₁₄ | = | Xx Yx Zx -iTx |

| S₂₁ S₂₂ S₂₃ S₂₄ | = | Xy Yy Zy -iTy |

| S₃₁ S₃₂ S₃₃ S₃₄ | = | Xz Yz Zz -iTz |

| S₄₁ S₄₂ S₄₃ S₄₄ | = | -iXt -iYt -iZt Tt |

where Xn Yx .....Xz, Tt are real magnitudes.
For a virtual displacement in a space-time sichel (with the previously
applied designation) the value of the integral

(17) W + δW = ∫∫∫∫ (∑Sh k (∂(xk + δxk))/∂xh dx dy dz dt

extended over the whole range of the sichel, may be called the tensional
work of the virtual displacement.
The sum which comes forth here, written in real magnitudes, is

Xx + Yy + Zz + Tt + Xx (∂δx)/∂x + Xy (∂δx)/∂y + ... Zz (∂δz)/∂z

- Xt (∂δx/∂t - ... + Tx (∂δt)/∂x + ... Tt (∂δt)/∂t

we can now postulate the following minimum principle in mechanics.
If any space-time Sichel be bounded, then for each virtual displacement in
the Sichel, the sum of the mass-works, and tension works shall always be an
extremum for that process of the space-time line in the Sichel which actually
occurs.
The meaning is, that for each virtual displacement,

([d(·δN + δW)]/dλ)λ = 0 = 0 (18)

By applying the methods of the Calculus of Variations, the following four
differential equations at once follow from this minimal principle by means
of the transformation (14), and the condition (15).

(19) ν ∂wh/∂τ = Kh + χwh (h = 1, 2, 3, 4)

whence Kh = ∂S1 h/∂x₁ + ∂S2 h/∂x₂ + ∂S3 h/∂x₃ + ∂S4 h/∂x₄, (20)

are components of the space-time vector 1st kind K = lor S, and X is a
factor, which is to be determined from the relation wẇ = - 1. By multiplying
(19) by wh, and summing the four, we obtain X = Kẇ, and therefore clearly
K + (Kẇ)w will be a space-time vector of the 1st kind which is normal to w.
Let us write out the components of this vector as

X, Y, Z, ·iT

Then we arrive at the following equation for the motion of matter,

(21) ν d/dτ (dx/dτ) = X, ν d/dτ (dy/dτ) = Y, ν d/dτ (dz/dτ) = Z,

ν d/dτ (dx/dτ) = T, and we have also

(dx/dτ)² + (dy/dτ)² + (dz/dτ)² > (dt/dτ)² = -1,

and X dx/dτ + Y dy/dτ + Z dz/dτ = T dt/dτ.

On the basis of this condition, the fourth of equations (21) is to be regarded
as a direct consequence of the first three.
From (21), we can deduce the law for the motion of a material point, i.e.,
the law for the career of an infinitely thin space-time filament.
Let x, y, z, t, denote a point on a principal line chosen in any manner within
the filament. We shall form the equations (21) for the points of the normal
cross section of the filament through x, y, z, t, and integrate them,
multiplying by the elementary contents of the cross section over the whole
space of the normal section. If the integrals of the right side be Rx Ry Rz Rt
and if m be the constant mass of the filament, we obtain

(22) m d/dτ dx/dτ = Rx,
m d/dτ dy/dτ = Ry,
m d/dτ dz/dτ = Rz,
m d/dτ dt/dτ = Rt

R is now a space-time vector of the 1st kind with the components (Rx Ry Rz
Rt) which is normal to the space-time vector of the 1st kind w,—the
velocity of the material point with the components

dx/dτ, dy/dτ, dz/dτ, i dt/dτ.

We may call this vector R the moving force of the material point.

If instead of integrating over the normal section, we integrate the equations
over that cross section of the filament which is normal to the t axis, and
passes through (x, y, z, t), then [See (4)] the equations (22) are obtained, but
are now multiplied by dτ/dt; in particular, the last equation comes out in the
form,

m d/dt (dt/dτ) = wx Rx dτ/dt + wy Ry dτ/dt + wz Rz dτ/dt.

The right side is to be looked upon as the amount of work done per unit of
time at the material point. In this equation, we obtain the energy-law for the
motion of the material point and the expression

m (dt/dτ - 1) = m [1/√(1 - w²) - 1]
= m (½ |w₁² + 3/8 |w₁⁴ + )

may be called the kinetic energy of the material point.
Since dt is always greater than dτ we may call the quotient (dt - dτ)/dτ as
the “Gain” (vorgehen) of the time over the proper-time of the material point
and the law can then be thus expressed;—The kinetic energy of a material
point is the product of its mass into the gain of the time over its proper-time.
The set of four equations (22) again shows the symmetry in (x, y, z, t),
which is demanded by the relativity postulate; to the fourth equation
however, a higher physical significance is to be attached, as we have
already seen in the analogous case in electrodynamics. On the ground of
this demand for symmetry, the triplet consisting of the first three equations
are to be constructed after the model of the fourth; remembering this
circumstance, we are justified in saying,—
“If the relativity-postulate be placed at the head of mechanics, then the
whole set of laws of motion follows from the law of energy.”
I cannot refrain from showing that no contradiction to the assumption on
the relativity-postulate can be expected from the phenomena of gravitation.
If B*(x*, y*, z*, t*) be a solid (fester) space-time point, then the region of
all those space-time points B (x, y, z, t), for which

(23) (x - x*)² + (y - y*)² + (z - z*)² = (t - t*)²

t - t* >= 0

may be called a “Ray-figure” (Strahl-gebilde) of the space time point B*.
A space-time line taken in any manner can be cut by this figure only at one
particular point; this easily follows from the convexity of the figure on the
one hand, and on the other hand from the fact that all directions of the
space-time lines are only directions from B* towards to the concave side of
the figure. Then B* may be called the light-point of B.
If in (23), the point (x y z t) be supposed to be fixed, the point (x* y* z* t*)
be supposed to be variable, then the relation (23) would represent the locus
of all the space-time points B*, which are light-points of B.
Let us conceive that a material point F of mass m may, owing to the
presence of another material point F*, experience a moving force according
to the following law. Let us picture to ourselves the space-time filaments of
F and F* along with the principal lines of the filaments. Let BC be an
infinitely small element of the principal line of F; further let B* be the light
point of B, C* be the light point of C on the principal line of F*; so that OA′
is the radius vector of the hyperboloidal fundamental figure (23) parallel to
B*C*, finally D* is the point of intersection of line B*C* with the space
normal to itself and passing through B. The moving force of the mass-point
F in the space-time point B is now the space-time vector of the first kind
which is normal to BC, and which is composed of the vectors
(24) mm*(OA′/B*D*)³ BD* in the direction of BD*, and another vector of
suitable value in direction of B*C*.
Now by (OA′/B*D*) is to be understood the ratio of the two vectors in
question. It is clear that this proposition at once shows the covariant
character with respect to a Lorentz-group.
Let us now ask how the space-time filament of F behaves when the material
point F* has a uniform translatory motion, i.e., the principal line of the
filament of F* is a line. Let us take the space time null-point in this, and by
means of a Lorentz-transformation, we can take this axis as the t-axis. Let x,

y, z, t, denote the point B, let τ* denote the proper time of B*, reckoned
from O. Our proposition leads to the equations

(25) d²x/dτ² = - m*x/(t - τ*)², d²y/dτ² = - m*y/(t - τ*)³

d²z/dτ² = -m*z/(t - τ*)³,
(26) d²t/dτ² = -m*/(t - τ*)² d(t - τ*)/dt

where (27) x² + y² + z² = (t - τ*)²
and (28) (dx/dτ)² + (dy/dτ)² + (dz/dτ)² = (dt/dτ)² - 1.
In consideration of (27), the three equations (25) are of the same form as the
equations for the motion of a material point subjected to attraction from a
fixed centre according to the Newtonian Law, only that instead of the time t,
the proper time τ of the material point occurs. The fourth equation (26)
gives then the connection between proper time and the time for the material
point.
Now for different values of τ′, the orbit of the space-point (x y z) is an
ellipse with the semi-major axis a and the eccentricity e. Let E denote the
eccentric anomaly, Τ the increment of the proper time for a complete
description of the orbit, finally nΤ = 2π, so that from a properly chosen
initial point τ, we have the Kepler-equation

(29) nτ = E - e sin E.

If we now change the unit of time, and denote the velocity of light by c,
then from (28), we obtain

(30) (dt/dτ)² - 1
= (m*/ac²) (1 + e cos E)/(1 - e cos E)

Now neglecting c⁻⁴ with regard to 1, it follows that

ndt = ndτ [ 1 + ½ m*/ac² (1 + e cos E)/(1 - e cos E) ]

from which, by applying (29),

(31) nt + const = (1 + ½ m*/ac²) nτ + m*/ac² Sin E.

the factor m*/ac² is here the square of the ratio of a certain average velocity
of F in its orbit to the velocity of light. If now m* denote the mass of the
sun, a the semi major axis of the earth’s orbit, then this factor amounts to
10⁻⁸.
The law of mass attraction which has been just described and which is
formulated in accordance with the relativity postulate would signify that
gravitation is propagated with the velocity of light. In view of the fact that
the periodic terms in (31) are very small, it is not possible to decide out of
astronomical observations between such a law (with the modified
mechanics proposed above) and the Newtonian law of attraction with
Newtonian mechanics.

SPACE AND TIME

A Lecture delivered before the Naturforscher Versammlung (Congress of
Natural Philosophers) at Cologne—(21st September, 1908).
Gentlemen,
The conceptions about time and space, which I hope to develop before you
to-day, has grown on experimental physical grounds. Herein lies its
strength. The tendency is radical. Henceforth, the old conception of space
for itself, and time for itself shall reduce to a mere shadow, and some sort of
union of the two will be found consistent with facts.

I

Now I want to show you how we can arrive at the changed concepts about
time and space from mechanics, as accepted now-a-days, from purely
mathematical considerations. The equations of Newtonian mechanics show
a twofold invariance, (i) their form remains unaltered when we subject the
fundamental space-coordinate system to any possible change of position,
(ii) when we change the system in its nature of motion, i. e., when we
impress upon it any uniform motion of translation, the null-point of time
plays no part. We are accustomed to look upon the axioms of geometry as
settled once for all, while we seldom have the same amount of conviction
regarding the axioms of mechanics, and therefore the two invariants are
seldom mentioned in the same breath. Each one of these denotes a certain
group of transformations for the differential equations of mechanics. We
look upon the existence of the first group as a fundamental characteristics
of space. We always prefer to leave off the second group to itself, and with
a light heart conclude that we can never decide from physical
considerations whether the space, which is supposed to be at rest, may not
finally be in uniform motion. So these two groups lead quite separate
existences besides each other. Their totally heterogeneous character may
scare us away from the attempt to compound them. Yet it is the whole
compounded group which as a whole gives us occasion for thought.
We wish to picture to ourselves the whole relation graphically. Let (x, y, z)
be the rectangular coordinates of space, and t denote the time. Subjects of
our perception are always connected with place and time. No one has
observed a place except at a particular time, or has observed a time except
at a particular place. Yet I respect the dogma that time and space have
independent existences. I will call a space-point plus a time-point, i.e., a
system of values x, y, z, t, as a world-point. The manifoldness of all possible
values of x, y, z, t, will be the world. I can draw four world-axes with the
chalk. Now any axis drawn consists of quickly vibrating molecules, and
besides, takes part in all the journeys of the earth ; and therefore gives us
occasion for reflection. The greater abstraction required for the four-axes
does not cause the mathematician any trouble. In order not to allow any

yawning gap to exist, we shall suppose that at every place and time,
something perceptible exists. In order not to specify either matter or
electricity, we shall simply style these as substances. We direct our attention
to the world-point x, y, z, t, and suppose that we are in a position to
recognise this substantial point at any subsequent time. Let dt be the time
element corresponding to the changes of space coordinates of this point [dx,
dy, dz]. Then we obtain (as a picture, so to speak, of the perennial life-
career of the substantial point),—a curve in the world—the world-line, the
points on which unambiguously correspond to the parameter t from +∞ to
-∞. The whole world appears to be resolved in such world-lines, and I may
just deviate from my point if I say that according to my opinion the physical
laws would find their fullest expression as mutual relations among these
lines.
By this conception of time and space, the (x, y, z) manifoldness t = 0 and its
two sides t < 0 and t > 0 falls asunder. If for the sake of simplicity, we keep
the null-point of time and space fixed, then the first named group of
mechanics signifies that at t = 0 we can give the x, y, and z-axes any
possible rotation about the null-point corresponding to the homogeneous
linear transformation of the expression

x² + y² + z².

The second group denotes that without changing the expression for the
mechanical laws, we can substitute (x - αt, y - βt, z - γt for (x, y, z) where (α,
β, γ) are any constants. According to this we can give the time-axis any
possible direction in the upper half of the world t > 0. Now what have the
demands of orthogonality in space to do with this perfect freedom of the
time-axis towards the upper half?
To establish this connection, let us take a positive parameter c, and let us
consider the figure

c²t² - x² - y² - z² = 1

According to the analogy of the hyperboloid of two sheets, this consists of
two sheets separated by t = 0. Let us consider the sheet, in the region of t >

0, and let us now conceive the transformation of x, y, z, t in the new system
of variables; (x’, y’, z’, t’) by means of which the form of the expression
will remain unaltered. Clearly the rotation of space round the null-point
belongs to this group of transformations. Now we can have a full idea of the
transformations which we picture to ourselves from a particular
transformation in which (y, z) remain unaltered. Let us draw the cross
section of the upper sheets with the plane of the x- and t-axes, i.e., the upper
half of the hyperbola c²t² - x² = 1, with its asymptotes (vide fig. 1).
Then let us draw the radius rector OA′, the tangent A′ B′ at A′, and let us
complete the parallelogram OA′ B′ C′; also produce B′ C′ to meet the x-axis
at D′. Let us now take Ox′, OA′ as new axes with the unit measuring rods
OC′ = 1, OA′ = (1/c) ; then the hyperbola is again expressed in the form c²t′²
- x′² = 1, t′ > 0 and the transition from (x, y, z, t) to (x′ y′ z′ t) is one of the
transitions in question. Let us add to this characteristic transformation any
possible displacement of the space and time null-points; then we get a
group of transformation depending only on c, which we may denote by Gc.
Now let us increase c to infinity. Thus (1/c) becomes zero and it appears
from the figure that the hyperbola is gradually shrunk into the x-axis, the
asymptotic angle becomes a straight one, and every special transformation
in the limit changes in such a manner that the t-axis can have any possible
direction upwards, and x′ more and more approximates to x. Remembering
this point it is clear that the full group belonging to Newtonian Mechanics is
simply the group Gc, with the value of c = ∞. In this state of affairs, and
since Gc is mathematically more intelligible than G∞, a mathematician may,
by a free play of imagination, hit upon the thought that natural phenomena
possess an invariance not only for the group G∞, but in fact also for a group
Gc, where c is finite, but yet exceedingly large compared to the usual
measuring units. Such a preconception would be an extraordinary triumph
for pure mathematics.
At the same time I shall remark for which value of c, this invariance can be
conclusively held to be true. For c, we shall substitute the velocity of light c
in free space. In order to avoid speaking either of space or of vacuum, we
may take this quantity as the ratio between the electrostatic and electro-
magnetic units of electricity.

We can form an idea of the invariant character of the expression for natural
laws for the group-transformation Gc in the following manner.
Out of the totality of natural phenomena, we can, by successive higher
approximations, deduce a coordinate system (x, y, z, t); by means of this
coordinate system, we can represent the phenomena according to definite
laws. This system of reference is by no means uniquely determined by the
phenomena. We can change the system of reference in any possible manner
corresponding to the above-mentioned group transformation Gc, but the
expressions for natural laws will not be changed thereby.
For example, corresponding to the above described figure, we can call t′ the
time, but then necessarily the space connected with it must be expressed by
the manifoldness (x′ y z). The physical laws are now expressed by means of
x′, y, z, t′,—and the expressions are just the same as in the case of x, y, z, t.
According to this, we shall have in the world, not one space, but many
spaces,—quite analogous to the case that the three-dimensional space
consists of an infinite number of planes. The three-dimensional geometry
will be a chapter of four-dimensional physics. Now you perceive, why I
said in the beginning that time and space shall reduce to mere shadows and
we shall have a world complete in itself.

II

Now the question may be asked,—what circumstances lead us to these
changed views about time and space, are they not in contradiction with
observed phenomena, do they finally guarantee us advantages for the
description of natural phenomena?
Before we enter into the discussion, a very important point must be noticed.
Suppose we have individualised time and space in any manner; then a
world-line parallel to the t-axis will correspond to a stationary point; a
world-line inclined to the t-axis will correspond to a point moving
uniformly; and a world-curve will correspond to a point moving in any
manner. Let us now picture to our mind the world-line passing through any
world point x, y, z, t; now if we find the world-line parallel to the radius
vector OA′ of the hyperboloidal sheet, then we can introduce OA′ as a new
time-axis, and then according to the new conceptions of time and space the
substance will appear to be at rest in the world point concerned. We shall
now introduce this fundamental axiom:—
The substance existing at any world point can always be conceived to be at
rest, if we establish our time and space suitably. The axiom denotes that in a
world-point, the expression

c²dt² - dx² - dy² - dz²

shall always be positive or what is equivalent to the same thing, every
velocity V should be smaller than c. c shall therefore be the upper limit for
all substantial velocities and herein lies a deep significance for the quantity
c. At the first impression, the axiom seems to be rather unsatisfactory. It is
to be remembered that only a modified mechanics will occur, in which the
square root of this differential combination takes the place of time, so that
cases in which the velocity is greater than c will play no part, something
like imaginary coordinates in geometry.

The impulse and real cause of inducement for the assumption of the group-
transformation Gc is the fact that the differential equation for the
propagation of light in vacant space possesses the group-transformation Gc.
On the other hand, the idea of rigid bodies has any sense only in a system
mechanics with the group Ginfinity. Now if we have an optics with Gc, and
on the other hand if there are rigid bodies, it is easy to see that a t-direction
can be defined by the two hyperboloidal shells common to the groups G∞,
and Gc, which has got the further consequence, that by means of suitable
rigid instruments in the laboratory, we can perceive a change in natural
phenomena, in case of different orientations, with regard to the direction of
progressive motion of the earth. But all efforts directed towards this object,
and even the celebrated interference-experiment of Michelson have given
negative results. In order to supply an explanation for this result, H. A.
Lorentz formed a hypothesis which practically amounts to an invariance of
optics for the group Gc. According to Lorentz every substance shall suffer a
contraction
1:(√(1 - v²/c²)) in length, in the direction of its motion

l/l′ = 1/√(1 - v²/c²) l′ = l(1 - v²/c²).

This hypothesis sounds rather phantastical. For the contraction is not to be
thought of as a consequence of the resistance of ether, but purely as a gift
from the skies, as a sort of condition always accompanying a state of
motion.
I shall show in our figure that Lorentz’s hypothesis is fully equivalent to the
new conceptions about time and space. Thereby it may appear more
intelligible. Let us now, for the sake of simplicity, neglect (y, z) and fix our
attention on a two dimensional world, in which let upright strips parallel to
the t-axis represent a state of rest and another parallel strip inclined to the t-
axis represent a state of uniform motion for a body, which has a constant
spatial extension (see fig. 1). If OA′ is parallel to the second strip, we can
take t′ as the t-axis and x′ as the x-axis, then the second body will appear to
be at rest, and the first body in uniform motion. We shall now assume that
the first body supposed to be at rest, has the length l, i.e., the cross section
PP of the first strip upon the x-axis = l. OC, where OC is the unit measuring

rod upon the x-axis—and the second body also, when supposed to be at rest,
has the same length l, this means that, the cross section Q′Q′ of the second
strip has a cross-section l· OC′, when measured parallel to the x′-axis. In
these two bodies, we have now images of two Lorentz-electrons, one of
which is at rest and the other moves uniformly. Now if we stick to our
original coordinates, then the extension of the second electron is given by
the cross section QQ of the strip belonging to it measured parallel to the x-
axis. Now it is clear since Q′Q′ = l· OC′, that QQ = l· OD′.
If (dc/dt) = v, an easy calculation gives that

OD′ = OC √(1-(v²/c²)), therefore (PP/QQ) = (1/√(1-(v²/c²))

This is the sense of Lorentz’s hypothesis about the contraction of electrons
in case of motion. On the other hand, if we conceive the second electron to
be at rest, and therefore adopt the system (x′, t′,) then the cross-section P′P′
of the strip of the electron parallel to OC′ is to be regarded as its length and
we shall find the first electron shortened with reference to the second in the
same proportion, for it is,

P′P′/Q′Q′ = OD/OC′ = OD′/OC = QQ/PP

Lorentz called the combination t′ of (t and x) as the local time (Ortszeit) of
the uniformly moving electron, and used a physical construction of this idea
for a better comprehension of the contraction-hypothesis. But to perceive
clearly that the time of an electron is as good as the time of any other
electron, i.e. t, t′ are to be regarded as equivalent, has been the service of A.
Einstein [Ann. d. Phys. 891, p. 1905, Jahrb. d. Radis. ... 4-4-11-1907.]
There the concept of time was shown to be completely and unambiguously
established by natural phenomena. But the concept of space was not arrived
at, either by Einstein or Lorentz, probably because in the case of the above-
mentioned spatial transformations, where the (x′, t′) plane coincides with
the x-t plane, the significance is possible that the x-axis of space some-how
remains conserved in its position.
We can approach the idea of space in a corresponding manner, though some
may regard the attempt as rather fantastical.

According to these ideas, the word “Relativity-Postulate” which has been
coined for the demands of invariance in the group G, seems to be rather
inexpressive for a true understanding of the group Gc, and for further
progress. Because the sense of the postulate is that the four-dimensional
world is given in space and time by phenomena only, but the projection in
time and space can be handled with a certain freedom, and therefore I
would rather like to give to this assertion the name “The Postulate of the
Absolute world” [World-Postulate].

III

By the world-postulate a similar treatment of the four determining
quantities x, y, z, t, of a world-point is possible. Thereby the forms under
which the physical laws come forth, gain in intelligibility, as I shall
presently show. Above all, the idea of acceleration becomes much more
striking and clear.
I shall again use the geometrical method of expression. Let us call any
world-point O as a “Space-time-null-point.” The cone

c²t² - x² - y² - z² = O

consists of two parts with O as apex, one part having t < 0, the other having
t > 0. The first, which we may call the fore-cone consists of all those points
which send light towards O, the second, which we may call the aft-cone,
consists of all those points which receive their light from O. The region
bounded by the fore-cone may be called the fore-side of O, and the region
bounded by the aft-cone may be called the aft-side of O. (Vide fig. 2).
On the aft-side of O we have the already considered hyperboloidal shell F =
c²t² - x² - y² - z² = 1, t > 0.
The region inside the two cones will be occupied by the hyperboloid of one
sheet

-F = x² + y² + z² - c²t² = k²,

where k² can have all possible positive values. The hyperbolas which lie
upon this figure with O as centre, are important for us. For the sake of
clearness the individual branches of this hyperbola will be called the “Inter-
hyperbola with centre O.” Such a hyperbolic branch, when thought of as a
world-line, would represent a motion which for t = -∞ and t = ∞,
asymptotically approaches the velocity of light c.

If, by way of analogy to the idea of vectors in space, we call any directed
length in the manifoldness x, y, z, t a vector, then we have to distinguish
between a time-vector directed from O towards the sheet ±F = 1, t > 0 and a
space-vector directed from O towards the sheet -F = 1. The time-axis can be
parallel to any vector of the first kind. Any world-point between the fore
and aft cones of O, may by means of the system of reference be regarded
either as synchronous with O, as well as later or earlier than O. Every
world-point on the fore-side of O is necessarily always earlier, every point
on the aft side of O, later than O. The limit c = ∞ corresponds to a complete
folding up of the wedge-shaped cross-section between the fore and aft
cones in the manifoldness t = 0. In the figure drawn, this cross-section has
been intentionally drawn with a different breadth.
Let us decompose a vector drawn from O towards (x, y, z, t) into its
components. If the directions of the two vectors are respectively the
directions of the radius vector OR to one of the surfaces ±F = 1, and of a
tangent RS at the point R of the surface, then the vectors shall be called
normal to each other. Accordingly

c²tt₁ - xx₁ - yy₁ - zz₁ = 0,

which is the condition that the vectors with the components (x, y, z, t) and
(x₁ y₁ z₁ t₁) are normal to each other.
For the measurement of vectors in different directions, the unit measuring
rod is to be fixed in the following manner;—a space-like vector from 0 to -
F = I is always to have the measure unity, and a time-like vector from O to
+F = 1, t > 0 is always to have the measure 1/c.
Let us now fix our attention upon the world-line of a substantive point
running through the world-point (x, y, z, t); then as we follow the progress
of the line, the quantity

dτ = (1/c) √(c²dt² - dx² - dy² - dz²),

corresponds to the time-like vector-element (dx, dy, dz, dt).

The integral τ = ∫dτ, taken over the world-line from any fixed initial point
P₀ to any variable final point P, may be called the “Proper-time” of the
substantial point at P₀ upon the world-line. We may regard (x, y, z, t), i.e.,
the components of the vector OP, as functions of the “proper-time” τ; let
([.x], [.y], [.z], [.t]) denote the first differential-quotients, and ([..x], [..y],
[..z], [..t]) the second differential quotients of (x, y, z, t) with regard to τ,
then these may respectively be called the Velocity-vector, and the
Acceleration-vector of the substantial point at P. Now we have

c² [.t²] - [.x²] - [.y²] - [.z²] = c²

c² [.t][..t] - [.x][..x] - [.y][..y] - [.z][..z] = 0

i.e., the ‘Velocity-vector’ is the time-like vector of unit measure in the
direction of the world-line at P, the ‘Acceleration-vector’ at P is normal to
the velocity-vector at P, and is in any case, a space-like vector.
Now there is, as can be easily seen, a certain hyperbola, which has three
infinitely contiguous points in common with the world-line at P, and of
which the asymptotes are the generators of a ‘fore-cone’ and an ‘aft-cone.’
This hyperbola may be called the “hyperbola of curvature” at P (vide fig. 3).
If M be the centre of this hyperbola, then we have to deal here with an
‘Inter-hyperbola’ with centre M. Let P = measure of the vector MP, then we
easily perceive that the acceleration-vector at P is a vector of magnitude c²/ρ
in the direction of MP.
If [..x], [..y], [..z], [..t] are nil, then the hyperbola of curvature at P reduces
to the straight line touching the world-line at P, and ρ = ∞.

IV

In order to demonstrate that the assumption of the group Gc for the physical
laws does not possibly lead to any contradiction, it is unnecessary to
undertake a revision of the whole of physics on the basis of the assumptions
underlying this group. The revision has already been successfully made in
the case of “Thermodynamics and Radiation,”[30] for “Electromagnetic
phenomena”,[31] and finally for “Mechanics with the maintenance of the
idea of mass.”
For this last mentioned province of physics, the question may be asked: if
there is a force with the components X, Y, Z (in the direction of the space-
axes) at a world-point (x, y, z, t), where the velocity-vector is ([.x], [.y], [.z],
[.t]), then how are we to regard this force when the system of reference is
changed in any possible manner? Now it is known that there are certain
well-tested theorems about the ponderomotive force in electromagnetic
fields, where the group Gc is undoubtedly permissible. These theorems lead
us to the following simple rule; if the system of reference be changed in any
way, then the supposed force is to be put as a force in the new space-
coordinates in such a manner, that the corresponding vector with the
components

[.t]X, [.t]Y, [.t]Z, [.t]T,

where T = 1/c² ([.x]/[.t] X + [.y]/[.t] Y + [.z]/[.t] Z) = 1/c²
(the rate of
which work is done at the world-point), remains unaltered.

This vector is always normal to the velocity-vector at P. Such a force-
vector, representing a force at P, may be called a moving force-vector at P.
Now the world-line passing through P will be described by a substantial
point with the constant mechanical mass m. Let us call m-times the
velocity-vector at P as the impulse-vector, and m-times the acceleration-
vector at P as the force-vector of motion, at P. According to these

definitions, the following law tells us how the motion of a point-mass takes
place under any moving force-vector[32]:
The force-vector of motion is equal to the moving force-vector.
This enunciation comprises four equations for the components in the four
directions, of which the fourth can be deduced from the first three, because
both of the above-mentioned vectors are perpendicular to the velocity-
vector. From the definition of T, we see that the fourth simply expresses the
“Energy-law.” Accordingly c²-times the component of the impulse-vector in
the direction of the t-axis is to be defined as the kinetic-energy of the point-
mass. The expression for this is

mc² dt/dτ = mc² /√(1 - v²/c²)

i.e., if we deduct from this the additive constant mc², we obtain the
expression ½ mv² of Newtonian-mechanics up to magnitudes of the order of
1/c². Hence it appears that the energy depends upon the system of reference.
But since the t-axis can be laid in the direction of any time-like axis,
therefore the energy-law comprises, for any possible system of reference,
the whole system of equations of motion. This fact retains its significance
even in the limiting case c = ∞, for the axiomatic construction of Newtonian
mechanics, as has already been pointed out by T. R. Schütz.[33]
From the very beginning, we can establish the ratio between the units of
time and space in such a manner, that the velocity of light becomes unity. If
we now write √-1 t = l, in the place of l, then the differential expression

dτ² = -(dx² + dy² + dz² + dl²),

becomes symmetrical in (x, y, r, l); this symmetry then enters into each law,
which does not contradict the world-postulate. We can clothe the “essential
nature of this postulate in the mystical, but mathematically significant
formula

3·10⁵ km = √-1 Sec.

V

The advantages arising from the formulation of the world-postulate are
illustrated by nothing so strikingly as by the expressions which tell us about
the reactions exerted by a point-charge moving in any manner according to
the Maxwell-Lorentz theory.
Let us conceive of the world-line of such an electron with the charge (e),
and let us introduce upon it the “Proper-time” τ reckoned from any possible
initial point. In order to obtain the field caused by the electron at any world-
point P₁ let us construct the fore-cone belonging to P₁ (vide fig. 4). Clearly
this cuts the unlimited world-line of the electron at a single point P, because
these directions are all time-like vectors. At P, let us draw the tangent to the
world-line, and let us draw from P₁ the normal to this tangent. Let r be the
measure of P₁Q. According to the definition of a fore-cone, r/e is to be
reckoned as the measure of PQ. Now at the world-point P₁, the vector-
potential of the field excited by e is represented by the vector in direction
PQ, having the magnitude e/cr, in its three space components along the x-,
y-, z-axes; the scalar-potential is represented by the component along the t-
axis. This is the elementary law found out by A. Lienard, and E. Wiechert.
[34]

If the field caused by the electron be described in the above-mentioned way,
then it will appear that the division of the field into electric and magnetic
forces is a relative one, and depends upon the time-axis assumed; the two
forces considered together bears some analogy to the force-screw in
mechanics; the analogy is, however, imperfect.
I shall now describe the ponderomotive force which is exerted by one
moving electron upon another moving electron. Let us suppose that the
world-line of a second point-electron passes through the world-point P₁. Let
us determine P, Q, r as before, construct the middle-point M of the
hyperbola of curvature at P, and finally the normal MN upon a line through
P which is parallel to QP₁. With P as the initial point, we shall establish a
system of reference in the following way: the t-axis will be laid along PQ,
the x-axis in the direction of QP₁. The y-axis in the direction of MN, then
the z-axis is automatically determined, as it is normal to the x-, y-, z-axes.
Let [:x], [:y], [:z], [:t] be the acceleration-vector at P, [.x]₁, [.y]₁ [.z]₁, [.t]₁ be

the velocity-vector at P₁. Then the force-vector exerted by the first election
e, (moving in any possible manner) upon the second election e, (likewise
moving in any possible manner) at P₁ is represented by

-e e₁([.t₁] - [.x₁]/c)F,

For the components Fx, Fy, Fz, Ft of the vector F the following three
relations hold:—

cFt - Fx = 1/r², Fy = [:y]/(c²r), Fz = 0,

and fourthly this vector F is normal to the velocity-vector P₁, and through
this circumstance alone, its dependence on this last velocity-vector arises.
If we compare with this expression the previous formulæ[35] giving the
elementary law about the ponderomotive action of moving electric charges
upon each other, then we cannot but admit, that the relations which occur
here reveal the inner essence of full simplicity first in four dimensions; but
in three dimensions, they have very complicated projections.
In the mechanics reformed according to the world-postulate, the
disharmonies which have disturbed the relations between Newtonian
mechanics and modern electrodynamics automatically disappear. I shall
now consider the position of the Newtonian law of attraction to this
postulate. I will assume that two point-masses m and m₁ describe their
world-lines; a moving force-vector is exercised by m upon m₁, and the
expression is just the same as in the case of the electron, only we have to
write +mm₁ instead -ee₁. We shall consider only the special case in which
the acceleration-vector of m is always zero: then t may be introduced in
such a manner that m may be regarded as fixed, the motion of m is now
subjected to the moving-force vector of m alone. If we now modify this
given vector by writing -([.]1/√(1-(v²/c²)) instead of [.t] ([.t] = 1 up to
magnitudes of the order (1[.]/c²)), then it appears that Kepler’s laws hold
good for the position (x₁, y₁, z₁), of m₁ at any time, only in place of the time
t₁, we have to write the proper time τ₁ of m₁. On the basis of this simple
remark, it can be seen that the proposed law of attraction in combination
with new mechanics is not less suited for the explanation of astronomical

phenomena than the Newtonian law of attraction in combination with
Newtonian mechanics.
Also the fundamental equations for electro-magnetic processes in moving
bodies are in accordance with the world-postulate. I shall also show on a
later occasion that the deduction of these equations, as taught by Lorentz,
are by no means to be given up.
The fact that the world-postulate holds without exception is, I believe, the
true essence of an electromagnetic picture of the world; the idea first
occurred to Lorentz, its essence was first picked out by Einstein, and is now
gradually fully manifest. In course of time, the mathematical consequences
will be gradually deduced, and enough suggestions will be forthcoming for
the experimental verification of the postulate; in this way even those, who
find it uncongenial, or even painful to give up the old, time-honoured
concepts, will be reconciled to the new ideas of time and space,—in the
prospect that they will lead to pre-established harmony between pure
mathematics and physics.

The Foundation of the Generalised Theory of Relativity
By A. Einstein.
From Annalen der Physik 4.49.1916.

The theory which is sketched in the following pages forms the most wide-
going generalization conceivable of what is at present known as “the theory
of Relativity;” this latter theory I differentiate from the former “Special
Relativity theory,” and suppose it to be known. The generalization of the
Relativity theory has been made much easier through the form given to the
special Relativity theory by Minkowski, which mathematician was the first
to recognize clearly the formal equivalence of the space like and time-like
co-ordinates, and who made use of it in the building up of the theory. The
mathematical apparatus useful for the general relativity theory, lay already
complete in the “Absolute Differential Calculus,” which were based on the
researches of Gauss, Riemann and Christoffel on the non-Euclidean
manifold, and which have been shaped into a system by Ricci and Levi-
civita, and already applied to the problems of theoretical physics. I have in
part B of this communication developed in the simplest and clearest
manner, all the supposed mathematical auxiliaries, not known to Physicists,
which will be useful for our purpose, so that, a study of the mathematical
literature is not necessary for an understanding of this paper. Finally in this
place I thank my friend Grossmann, by whose help I was not only spared
the study of the mathematical literature pertinent to this subject, but who
also aided me in the researches on the field equations of gravitation.

A
Principal considerations about the Postulate of Relativity.

§ 1. Remarks on the Special Relativity Theory.

The special relativity theory rests on the following postulate which also
holds valid for the Galileo-Newtonian mechanics.
If a co-ordinate system K be so chosen that when referred to it, the physical
laws hold in their simplest forms these laws would be also valid when
referred to another system of co-ordinates K′ which is subjected to an
uniform translational motion relative to K. We call this postulate “The
Special Relativity Principle.” By the word special, it is signified that the
principle is limited to the case, when K′ has uniform translatory motion
with reference to K, but the equivalence of K and K′ does not extend to the
case of non-uniform motion of K′ relative to K.
The Special Relativity Theory does not differ from the classical mechanics
through the assumption of this postulate, but only through the postulate of
the constancy of light-velocity in vacuum which, when combined with the
special relativity postulate, gives in a well-known way, the relativity of
synchronism as well as the Lorenz-transformation, with all the relations
between moving rigid bodies and clocks.
The modification which the theory of space and time has undergone
through the special relativity theory, is indeed a profound one, but a
weightier point remains untouched. According to the special relativity
theory, the theorems of geometry are to be looked upon as the laws about
any possible relative positions of solid bodies at rest, and more generally
the theorems of kinematics, as theorems which describe the relation
between measurable bodies and clocks. Consider two material points of a
solid body at rest; then according to these conceptions there corresponds to
these points a wholly definite extent of length, independent of kind,
position, orientation and time of the body.

Similarly let us consider two positions of the pointers of a clock which is at
rest with reference to a co-ordinate system; then to these positions, there
always corresponds, a time-interval of a definite length, independent of
time and place. It would be soon shown that the general relativity theory
can not hold fast to this simple physical significance of space and time.

§ 2. About the reasons which explain the extension of the relativity-
postulate.

To the classical mechanics (no less than) to the special relativity theory, is
attached an episteomological defect, which was perhaps first cleanly
pointed out by E. Mach. We shall illustrate it by the following example; Let
two fluid bodies of equal kind and magnitude swim freely in space at such a
great distance from one another (and from all other masses) that only that
sort of gravitational forces are to be taken into account which the parts of
any of these bodies exert upon each other. The distance of the bodies from
one another is invariable. The relative motion of the different parts of each
body is not to occur. But each mass is seen to rotate by an observer at rest
relative to the other mass round the connecting line of the masses with a
constant angular velocity (definite relative motion for both the masses).
Now let us think that the surfaces of both the bodies (S₁ and S₂) are
measured with the help of measuring rods (relatively at rest); it is then
found that the surface of S₁ is a sphere and the surface of the other is an
ellipsoid of rotation. We now ask, why is this difference between the two
bodies? An answer to this question can only then be regarded as satisfactory
from the episteomological standpoint when the thing adduced as the cause
is an observable fact of experience. The law of causality has the sense of a
definite statement about the world of experience only when observable facts
alone appear as causes and effects.
The Newtonian mechanics does not give to this question any satisfactory
answer. For example, it says:—The laws of mechanics hold true for a space
R₁ relative to which the body S₁ is at rest, not however for a space relative
to which S₂ is at rest.
The Galiliean space, which is here introduced is however only a purely
imaginary cause, not an observable thing. It is thus clear that the Newtonian

mechanics does not, in the case treated here, actually fulfil the requirements
of causality, but produces on the mind a fictitious complacency, in that it
makes responsible a wholly imaginary cause R₁ for the different behaviours
of the bodies S₁ and S₂ which are actually observable.
A satisfactory explanation to the question put forward above can only be
thus given:—that the physical system composed of S₁ and S₂ shows for
itself alone no conceivable cause to which the different behaviour of S₁ and
S₂ can be attributed. The cause must thus lie outside the system. We are
therefore led to the conception that the general laws of motion which
determine specially the forms of S₁ and S₂ must be of such a kind, that the
mechanical behaviour of S₁ and S₂ must be essentially conditioned by the
distant masses, which we had not brought into the system considered. These
distant masses, (and their relative motion as regards the bodies under
consideration) are then to be looked upon as the seat of the principal
observable causes for the different behaviours of the bodies under
consideration. They take the place of the imaginary cause R₁. Among all the
conceivable spaces R₁ and R₂ moving in any manner relative to one
another, there is a priori, no one set which can be regarded as affording
greater advantages, against which the objection which was already raised
from the standpoint of the theory of knowledge cannot be again revived.
The laws of physics must be so constituted that they should remain valid for
any system of co-ordinates moving in any manner. We thus arrive at an
extension of the relativity postulate.
Besides this momentous episteomological argument, there is also a well-
known physical fact which speaks in favour of an extension of the relativity
theory. Let there be a Galiliean co-ordinate system K relative to which (at
least in the four-dimensional region considered) a mass at a sufficient
distance from other masses move uniformly in a line. Let K′ be a second co-
ordinate system which has a uniformly accelerated motion relative to K.
Relative to K′ any mass at a sufficiently great distance experiences an
accelerated motion such that its acceleration and the direction of
acceleration is independent of its material composition and its physical
conditions.
Can any observer, at rest relative to K′, then conclude that he is in an
actually accelerated reference-system? This is to be answered in the
negative; the above-named behaviour of the freely moving masses relative

to K′ can be explained in as good a manner in the following way. The
reference-system K′ has no acceleration. In the space-time region
considered there is a gravitation-field which generates the accelerated
motion relative to K′.
This conception is feasible, because to us the experience of the existence of
a field of force (namely the gravitation field) has shown that it possesses the
remarkable property of imparting the same acceleration to all bodies. The
mechanical behaviour of the bodies relative to K′ is the same as experience
would expect of them with reference to systems which we assume from
habit as stationary; thus it explains why from the physical stand-point it can
be assumed that the systems K and K′ can both with the same legitimacy be
taken as at rest, that is, they will be equivalent as systems of reference for a
description of physical phenomena.
From these discussions we see, that the working out of the general relativity
theory must, at the same time, lead to a theory of gravitation; for we can
“create” a gravitational field by a simple variation of the co-ordinate
system. Also we see immediately that the principle of the constancy of
light-velocity must be modified, for we recognise easily that the path of a
ray of light with reference to K′ must be, in general, curved, when light
travels with a definite and constant velocity in a straight line with reference
to K.

§ 3. The time-space continuum. Requirements of the general Co-variance
for the equations expressing the laws of Nature in general.

In the classical mechanics as well as in the special relativity theory, the co-
ordinates of time and space have an immediate physical significance; when
we say that any arbitrary point has x₁ as its X₁ co-ordinate, it signifies that
the projection of the point-event on the X₁-axis ascertained by means of a
solid rod according to the rules of Euclidean Geometry is reached when a
definite measuring rod, the unit rod, can be carried x₁ times from the origin
of co-ordinates along the X₁ axis. A point having x₄ = t₁ as the X₄ co-
ordinate signifies that a unit clock which is adjusted to be at rest relative to
the system of co-ordinates, and coinciding in its spatial position with the

point-event and set according to some definite standard has gone over x₄ = t
periods before the occurrence of the point-event.
This conception of time and space is continually present in the mind of the
physicist, though often in an unconscious way, as is clearly recognised from
the role which this conception has played in physical measurements. This
conception must also appear to the reader to be lying at the basis of the
second consideration of the last paragraph and imparting a sense to these
conceptions. But we wish to show that we are to abandon it and in general
to replace it by more general conceptions in order to be able to work out
thoroughly the postulate of general relativity,—the case of special relativity
appearing as a limiting case when there is no gravitation.
We introduce in a space, which is free from Gravitation-field, a Galiliean
Co-ordinate System K (x, y, z, t) and also, another system K′ (x′ y′ z′ t′)
rotating uniformly relative to K. The origin of both the systems as well as
their z-axes might continue to coincide. We will show that for a space-time
measurement in the system K′, the above established rules for the physical
significance of time and space can not be maintained. On grounds of
symmetry it is clear that a circle round the origin in the XY plane of K, can
also be looked upon as a circle in the plane (X′, Y′) of K′. Let us now think
of measuring the circumference and the diameter of these circles, with a
unit measuring rod (infinitely small compared with the radius) and take the
quotient of both the results of measurement. If this experiment be carried
out with a measuring rod at rest relatively to the Galiliean system K we
would get π, as the quotient. The result of measurement with a rod
relatively at rest as regards K′ would be a number which is greater than π.
This can be seen easily when we regard the whole measurement-process
from the system K and remember that the rod placed on the periphery
suffers a Lorenz-contraction, not however when the rod is placed along the
radius. Euclidean Geometry therefore does not hold for the system K′; the
above fixed conceptions of co-ordinates which assume the validity of
Euclidean Geometry fail with regard to the system K′. We cannot similarly
introduce in K′ a time corresponding to physical requirements, which will
be shown by all similarly prepared clocks at rest relative to the system K′.
In order to see this we suppose that two similarly made clocks are arranged
one at the centre and one at the periphery of the circle, and considered from
the stationary system K. According to the well-known results of the special

relativity theory it follows—(as viewed from K)—that the clock placed at
the periphery will go slower than the second one which is at rest. The
observer at the common origin of co-ordinates who is able to see the clock
at the periphery by means of light will see the clock at the periphery going
slower than the clock beside him. Since he cannot allow the velocity of
light to depend explicitly upon the time in the way under consideration he
will interpret his observation by saying that the clock on the periphery
actually goes slower than the clock at the origin. He cannot therefore do
otherwise than define time in such a way that the rate of going of a clock
depends on its position.
We therefore arrive at this result. In the general relativity theory time and
space magnitudes cannot be so defined that the difference in spatial co-
ordinates can be immediately measured by the unit-measuring rod, and
time-like co-ordinate difference with the aid of a normal clock.
The means hitherto at our disposal, for placing our co-ordinate system in
the time-space continuum, in a definite way, therefore completely fail and it
appears that there is no other way which will enable us to fit the co-ordinate
system to the four-dimensional world in such a way, that by it we can
expect to get a specially simple formulation of the laws of Nature. So that
nothing remains for us but to regard all conceivable co-ordinate systems as
equally suitable for the description of natural phenomena. This amounts to
the following law:—
That in general, Laws of Nature are expressed by means of equations which
are valid for all co-ordinate systems, that is, which are covariant for all
possible transformations. It is clear that a physics which satisfies this
postulate will be unobjectionable from the standpoint of the general
relativity postulate. Because among all substitutions there are, in every case,
contained those, which correspond to all relative motions of the co-ordinate
system (in three dimensions). This condition of general covariance which
takes away the last remnants of physical objectivity from space and time, is
a natural requirement, as seen from the following considerations. All our
well-substantiated space-time propositions amount to the determination of
space-time coincidences. If, for example, the event consisted in the motion
of material points, then, for this last case, nothing else are really observable
except the encounters between two or more of these material points. The
results of our measurements are nothing else than well-proved theorems

about such coincidences of material points, of our measuring rods with
other material points, coincidences between the hands of a clock, dial-
marks and point-events occurring at the same position and at the same time.
The introduction of a system of co-ordinates serves no other purpose than
an easy description of totality of such coincidences. We fit to the world our
space-time variables (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄) such that to any and every point-event
corresponds a system of values of (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄). Two coincident point-events
correspond to the same value of the variables (x₁ x₂ x₃ x₄); i.e., the
coincidence is characterised by the equality of the co-ordinates. If we now
introduce any four functions (x′₁ x′₂ x′₃ x′₄) as co-ordinates, so that there is
an unique correspondence between them, the equality of all the four co-
ordinates in the new system will still be the expression of the space-time
coincidence of two material points. As the purpose of all physical laws is to
allow us to remember such coincidences, there is a priori no reason present,
to prefer a certain co-ordinate system to another; i.e., we get the condition
of general covariance.

§ 4. Relation of four co-ordinates to spatial and time-like measurements.

Analytical expression for the Gravitation-field.

I am not trying in this communication to deduce the general Relativity-
theory as the simplest logical system possible, with a minimum of axioms.
But it is my chief aim to develop the theory in such a manner that the reader
perceives the psychological naturalness of the way proposed, and the
fundamental assumptions appear to be most reasonable according to the
light of experience. In this sense, we shall now introduce the following
supposition; that for an infinitely small four-dimensional region, the
relativity theory is valid in the special sense when the axes are suitably
chosen.
The nature of acceleration of an infinitely small (positional) co-ordinate
system is hereby to be so chosen, that the gravitational field does not
appear; this is possible for an infinitely small region. X₁, X₂, X₃ are the
spatial co-ordinates; X₄ is the corresponding time-co-ordinate measured by

some suitable measuring clock. These co-ordinates have, with a given
orientation of the system, an immediate physical significance in the sense of
the special relativity theory (when we take a rigid rod as our unit of
measure). The expression

(1) ds² = - dX₁² - dX₂² - dX₃² + dX₄²

had then, according to the special relativity theory, a value which may be
obtained by space-time measurement, and which is independent of the
orientation of the local co-ordinate system. Let us take ds as the magnitude
of the line-element belonging to two infinitely near points in the four-
dimensional region. If ds² belonging to the element (dX₁, dX₂, dX₃, dX₄) be
positive we call it with Minkowski, time-like, and in the contrary case
space-like.
To the line-element considered, i.e., to both the infinitely near point-events
belong also definite differentials dx₁, dx₂, dx₃, dx₄, of the four-dimensional
co-ordinates of any chosen system of reference. If there be also a local
system of the above kind given for the case under consideration, dX’s
would then be represented by definite linear homogeneous expressions of
the form

(2) dXν = σσaνσdxσ

If we substitute the expression in (1) we get

(3) ds² = σστgστdxσdxτ

where gστ will be functions of xσ, but will no longer depend upon the
orientation and motion of the ‘local’ co-ordinates; for ds² is a definite
magnitude belonging to two point-events infinitely near in space and time
and can be got by measurements with rods and clocks. The gτσ’s are here to
be so chosen, that gτσ = gστ; the summation is to be extended over all values
of σ and τ, so that the sum is to be extended, over 4 × 4 terms, of which 12
are equal in pairs.

From the method adopted here, the case of the usual relativity theory comes
out when owing to the special behaviour of gστ in a finite region it is
possible to choose the system of co-ordinates in such a way that gστ
assumes constant values—

{ -1, 0, 0, 0
(4) { 0 -1 0 0
{ 0 0 -1 0
{ 0 0 0 +1

We would afterwards see that the choice of such a system of co-ordinates
for a finite region is in general not possible.
From the considerations in § 2 and § 3 it is clear, that from the physical
stand-point the quantities gστ are to be looked upon as magnitudes which
describe the gravitation-field with reference to the chosen system of axes.
We assume firstly, that in a certain four-dimensional region considered, the
special relativity theory is true for some particular choice of co-ordinates.
The gστ’s then have the values given in (4). A free material point moves
with reference to such a system uniformly in a straight-line. If we now
introduce, by any substitution, the space-time co-ordinates x₁...x₄ then in the
new system gμν’s are no longer constants, but functions of space and time.
At the same time, the motion of a free point-mass in the new co-ordinates,
will appear as curvilinear, and not uniform, in which the law of motion, will
be independent of the nature of the moving mass-points. We can thus signify
this motion as one under the influence of a gravitation field. We see that the
appearance of a gravitation-field is connected with space-time variability of
gστ’s. In the general case, we can not by any suitable choice of axes, make
special relativity theory valid throughout any finite region. We thus deduce
the conception that gστ’s describe the gravitational field. According to the
general relativity theory, gravitation thus plays an exceptional rôle as
distinguished from the others, specially the electromagnetic forces, in as
much as the 10 functions gστ representing gravitation, define immediately
the metrical properties of the four-dimensional region.

B
Mathematical Auxiliaries for Establishing the General Covariant
Equations.

We have seen before that the general relativity-postulate leads to the
condition that the system of equations for Physics, must be co-variants for
any possible substitution of co-ordinates x₁, ... x₄; we have now to see how
such general co-variant equations can be obtained. We shall now turn our
attention to these purely mathematical propositions. It will be shown that in
the solution, the invariant ds, given in equation (3) plays a fundamental
rôle, which we, following Gauss’s Theory of Surfaces, style as the line-
element.
The fundamental idea of the general co-variant theory is this:—With
reference to any co-ordinate system, let certain things (tensors) be defined
by a number of functions of co-ordinates which are called the components
of the tensor. There are now certain rules according to which the
components can be calculated in a new system of co-ordinates, when these
are known for the original system, and when the transformation connecting
the two systems is known. The things herefrom designated as “Tensors”
have further the property that the transformation equation of their
components are linear and homogeneous; so that all the components in the
new system vanish if they are all zero in the original system. Thus a law of
Nature can be formulated by putting all the components of a tensor equal to
zero so that it is a general co-variant equation; thus while we seek the laws
of formation of the tensors, we also reach the means of establishing general
co-variant laws.

5. Contra-variant and co-variant Four-vector.

Contra-variant Four-vector. The line-element is defined by the four
components dxν, whose transformation law is expressed by the equation

"(5)."

The dx′σ’s are expressed as linear and homogeneous function of dxν’s; we
can look upon the differentials of the co-ordinates as the components of a
tensor, which we designate specially as a contravariant Four-vector.
Everything which is defined by Four quantities Aσ, with reference to a co-
ordinate system, and transforms according to the same law,

"(5a)."

we may call a contra-variant Four-vector. From (5. a), it follows at once that
the sums (Aσ ± Bσ) are also components of a four-vector, when Aσ and Bσ
are so; corresponding relations hold also for all systems afterwards
introduced as “tensors” (Rule of addition and subtraction of Tensors).

Co-variant Four-vector.

We call four quantities Aν as the components of a covariant four-vector,
when for any choice of the contra-variant four vector Bν (6) ∑ν Aν Bν =
Invariant. From this definition follows the law of transformation of the co-
variant four-vectors. If we substitute in the right hand side of the equation

∑σ A′σ Bσ′ = ∑ν Aν Bν.

the expressions

for Bν following from the inversion of the equation (5a) we get

As in the above equation Bσ′ are independent of one another and perfectly
arbitrary, it follows that the transformation law is:—

Remarks on the simplification of the mode of writing the expressions. A
glance at the equations of this paragraph will show that the indices which
appear twice within the sign of summation [for example ν in (5)] are those
over which the summation is to be made and that only over the indices
which appear twice. It is therefore possible, without loss of clearness, to
leave off the summation sign; so that we introduce the rule: wherever the
index in any term of an expression appears twice, it is to be summed over
all of them except when it is not expressedly said to the contrary.
The difference between the co-variant and the contra-variant four-vector
lies in the transformation laws [(7) and (5)]. Both the quantities are tensors
according to the above general remarks; in it lies its significance. In
accordance with Ricci and Levi-civita, the contravariants and co-variants
are designated by the over and under indices.

§ 6. Tensors of the second and higher ranks.

Contravariant tensor:—If we now calculate all the 16 products Aμν of the
components Aμ Bν, of two contravariant four-vectors

(8) Aμν = AμBν

Aμν, will according to (8) and (5 a) satisfy the following transformation law.

"(9)."

We call a thing which, with reference to any reference system is defined by
16 quantities and fulfils the transformation relation (9), a contravariant
tensor of the second rank. Not every such tensor can be built from two four-
vectors, (according to 8). But it is easy to show that any 16 quantities Aμν,
can be represented as the sum of AμBν of properly chosen four pairs of four-
vectors. From it, we can prove in the simplest way all laws which hold true
for the tensor of the second rank defined through (9), by proving it only for
the special tensor of the type (8).
Contravariant Tensor of any rank:—It is clear that corresponding to (8) and
(9), we can define contravariant tensors of the 3rd and higher ranks, with 4³,
etc. components. Thus it is clear from (8) and (9) that in this sense, we can
look upon contravariant four-vectors, as contravariant tensors of the first
rank.

Co-variant tensor.

If on the other hand, we take the 16 products Aμν of the components of two
co-variant four-vectors Aμ and Bν,

(10) Aμν = Aμ Bν.

for them holds the transformation law

"(11)."

By means of these transformation laws, the co-variant tensor of the second
rank is defined. All re-marks which we have already made concerning the
contravariant tensors, hold also for co-variant tensors.

Remark:—

It is convenient to treat the scalar Invariant either as a contravariant or a co-
variant tensor of zero rank.
Mixed tensor. We can also define a tensor of the second rank of the type

(12) Aμν = AμBν

which is co-variant with reference to μ and contravariant with reference to
ν. Its transformation law is

"(13)."

Naturally there are mixed tensors with any number of co-variant indices,
and with any number of contra-variant indices. The co-variant and contra-
variant tensors can be looked upon as special cases of mixed tensors.

Symmetrical tensors:—

A contravariant or a co-variant tensor of the second or higher rank is called
symmetrical when any two components obtained by the mutual interchange
of two indices are equal. The tensor Aμν or Aμν is symmetrical, when we
have for any combination of indices

(14) Aμν = Aνμ

or

(14a) Aμν = Aνμ.

It must be proved that a symmetry so defined is a property independent of
the system of reference. It follows in fact from (9) remembering (14)

Antisymmetrical tensor.

A contravariant or co-variant tensor of the 2nd, 3rd or 4th rank is called
antisymmetrical when the two components got by mutually interchanging
any two indices are equal and opposite. The tensor or Aμν or Aμν is thus
antisymmetrical when we have

(15) Aμν = -Aνμ

or

(15a) Aμν = -Aνμ.

Of the 16 components Aμν, the four components Aμμ vanish, the rest are
equal and opposite in pairs; so that there are only 6 numerically different
components present (Six-vector).
Thus we also see that the antisymmetrical tensor Aμνσ (3rd rank) has only 4
components numerically different, and the antisymmetrical tensor Aμνστ only
one. Symmetrical tensors of ranks higher than the fourth, do not exist in a
continuum of 4 dimensions.

§ 7. Multiplication of Tensors.

Outer multiplication of Tensors:—We get from the components of a tensor
of rank z, and another of a rank z′, the components of a tensor of rank (z +
z′) for which we multiply all the components of the first with all the
components of the second in pairs. For example, we obtain the tensor Τ
from the tensors A and B of different kinds:—

Τμνσ = AμνBσ,

Ταβγδ = AαβBγδ,

Ταβγδ = AαβBγδ.

The proof of the tensor character of Τ, follows immediately from the
expressions (8), (10) or (12), or the transformation equations (9), (11), (13);
equations (8), (10) and (12) are themselves examples of the outer
multiplication of tensors of the first rank.

Reduction in rank of a mixed Tensor.

From every mixed tensor we can get a tensor which is two ranks lower,
when we put an index of co-variant character equal to an index of the
contravariant character and sum according to these indices (Reduction). We

get for example, out of the mixed tensor of the fourth rank Aαβγδ, the mixed
tensor of the second rank

Aβδ = Aαβαδ = (∑α Aαβαδ)

and from it again by “reduction” the tensor of the zero rank

A = Aββ = Aαβαβ.

The proof that the result of reduction retains a truly tensorial character,
follows either from the representation of tensor according to the
generalisation of (12) in combination with (6) or out of the generalisation of
(13).

Inner and mixed multiplication of Tensors.

This consists in the combination of outer multiplication with reduction.
Examples:—From the co-variant tensor of the second rank Aμν and the
contravariant tensor of the first rank Bσ we get by outer multiplication the
mixed tensor

Dσμν = Aμν Bσ .

Through reduction according to indices ν and σ (i.e., putting ν = σ), the co-
variant four vector

Dμ = Dνμν = Aμν Bν is generated.

These we denote as the inner product of the tensor Aμν and Bσ. Similarly we
get from the tensors Aμν and Bστ through outer multiplication and two-fold
reduction the inner product Aμν Bμν. Through outer multiplication and one-

fold reduction we get out of Aμν and Bστ, the mixed tensor of the second
rank Dτμ = Aμν Bτν. We can fitly call this operation a mixed one; for it is
outer with reference to the indices μ and τ and inner with respect to the
indices ν and σ.
We now prove a law, which will be often applicable for proving the tensor-
character of certain quantities. According to the above representation, Aμν
Bμν is a scalar, when Aμν and Bστ are tensors. We also remark that when Aμν
Bμν is an invariant for every choice of the tensor Bμν, then Aμν has a tensorial
character.
Proof:—According to the above assumption, for any substitution we have

Aστ′ Bστ′ = Aμν Bμν.

From the inversion of (9) we have however

Substitution of this for Bμν in the above equation gives

This can be true, for any choice of Bστ′ only when the term within the
bracket vanishes. From which by referring to (11), the theorem at once
follows. This law correspondingly holds for tensors of any rank and
character. The proof is quite similar. The law can also be put in the
following form. If Bμ and Cν are any two vectors, and if for every choice of
them the inner product Aμν Bμ Cν is a scalar, then Aμν is a co-variant tensor.
The last law holds even when there is the more special formulation, that
with any arbitrary choice of the four-vector Bμ alone the scalar product Aμν

Bμ Bν is a scalar, in which case we have the additional condition that Aμν
satisfies the symmetry condition. According to the method given above, we
prove the tensor character of (Aμν + Aνμ), from which on account of
symmetry follows the tensor-character of Aμν. This law can easily be
generalized in the case of co-variant and contravariant tensors of any rank.
Finally, from what has been proved, we can deduce the following law
which can be easily generalized for any kind of tensor: If the quantities Aμν
Bν form a tensor of the first rank, when Bν is any arbitrarily chosen four-
vector, then Aμν is a tensor of the second rank. If for example, Cμ is any
four-vector, then owing to the tensor character of Aμν Bν, the inner product
Aμν Cμ Bν is a scalar, both the four-vectors Cμ and Bν being arbitrarily
chosen. Hence the proposition follows at once.

A few words about the Fundamental Tensor gμν.

The co-variant fundamental tensor—In the invariant expression of the
square of the linear element

ds² = gμν dxμ dxν

dxμ plays the rôle of any arbitrarily chosen contravariant vector, since
further gμν = gνμ, it follows from the considerations of the last paragraph
that gμν is a symmetrical co-variant tensor of the second rank. We call it the
“fundamental tensor.” Afterwards we shall deduce some properties of this
tensor, which will also be true for any tensor of the second rank. But the
special rôle of the fundamental tensor in our Theory, which has its physical
basis on the particularly exceptional character of gravitation makes it clear
that those relations are to be developed which will be required only in the
case of the fundamental tensor.

The co-variant fundamental tensor.

If we form from the determinant scheme | gμν | the minors of gμν and divide
them by the determinant g = | gμν | we get certain quantities gμν = gνμ, which
as we shall prove generates a contravariant tensor.
According to the well-known law of Determinants

(16) gμσ gνσ = δμν

where δμν is 1, or 0, according as μ = ν or not. Instead of the above
expression for ds², we can also write

gμσ δνσ dxμ dxν

or according to (16) also in the form

gμσ gντ gστ dxμ dxν

Now according to the rules of multiplication, of the fore-going paragraph,
the magnitudes

dξσ = gμσ dxμ

forms a co-variant four-vector, and in fact (on account of the arbitrary
choice of dxμ) any arbitrary four-vector.
If we introduce it in our expression, we get

ds² = gστ dξσ dξτ.

For any choice of the vectors dξσ dξτ this is scalar, and gστ, according to its
definition is a symmetrical thing in σ and τ, so it follows from the above
results, that gστ is a contravariant tensor. Out of (16) it also follows that δνμ
is a tensor which we may call the mixed fundamental tensor.

Determinant of the fundamental tensor.

According to the law of multiplication of determinants, we have

| gμα gαν | = | gμα | | gαν |

On the other hand we have

| gμα gαν | = | δνμ | = 1

So that it follows (17) that | gμν | | gμν | = 1.

Invariant of volume.

We see first the transformation law for the determinant g = | gμν |.
According to (11)

From this by applying the law of multiplication twice, we obtain

or

"(A)."

On the other hand the law of transformation of the volume element

dτ′ = ∫ dx₁ dx₂ dx₃ dx₄

is according to the wellknown law of Jacobi.

"(B)."

by multiplication of the two last equations (A) and (B) we get

(18) = √g dτ′ = √g dτ.

Instead of √g, we shall afterwards introduce √(-g) which has a real value on
account of the hyperbolic character of the time-space continuum. The
invariant √(-g)dτ, is equal in magnitude to the four-dimensional volume-
element measured with solid rods and clocks, in accordance with the special
relativity theory.
Remarks on the character of the space-time continuum—Our assumption
that in an infinitely small region the special relativity theory holds, leads us
to conclude that ds² can always, according to (1) be expressed in real
magnitudes dX₁ ... dXh. If we call dτ₀ the “natural” volume element dX₁
dX₂ dX₃ dX₄ we have thus (18a) dτ₀ = √(g)iτ.

Should √(-g) vanish at any point of the four-dimensional continuum it
would signify that to a finite co-ordinate volume at the place corresponds an
infinitely small “natural volume.” This can never be the case; so that g can
never change its sign; we would, according to the special relativity theory
assume that g has a finite negative value. It is a hypothesis about the
physical nature of the continuum considered, and also a pre-established rule
for the choice of co-ordinates.
If however (-g) remains positive and finite, it is clear that the choice of co-
ordinates can be so made that this quantity becomes equal to one. We would
afterwards see that such a limitation of the choice of co-ordinates would
produce a significant simplification in expressions for laws of nature.
In place of (18) it follows then simply that

dτ′ = d

from this it follows, remembering the law of Jacobi,

"(19)."

With this choice of co-ordinates, only substitutions with determinant 1 are
allowable.
It would however be erroneous to think that this step signifies a partial
renunciation of the general relativity postulate. We do not seek those laws
of nature which are co-variants with regard to the transformations having
the determinant 1, but we ask: what are the general co-variant laws of
nature? First we get the law, and then we simplify its expression by a
special choice of the system of reference.

Building up of new tensors with the help of the fundamental tensor.

Through inner, outer and mixed multiplications of a tensor with the
fundamental tensor, tensors of other kinds and of other ranks can be formed.
Example:—

Aμ = gμσ Aσ

A = gμν Aμν

We would point out specially the following combinations:

Aμν = gμα gνβ Aαβ

Aμν = gμα gνβ Aαβ

(complement to the co-variant or contravariant tensors)

and Bμν = gμν gαβ Aαβ

We can call Bμν the reduced tensor related to Aμν.
Similarly

Bμν = gμνgαβAαβ.

It is to be remarked that gμν is no other than the “complement” of gμν for we
have,—

gμαgνβgαβ = gμαδνα = gμν.

§ 9. Equation of the geodetic line (or of point-motion).

As the “line element” ds is a definite magnitude independent of the co-
ordinate system, we have also between two points P₁ and P₂ of a four
dimensional continuum a line for which ∫ds is an extremum (geodetic line),
i.e., one which has got a significance independent of the choice of co-
ordinates.
Its equation is

(20) δ{ ∫P₂P₁ ds } = 0

From this equation, we can in a wellknown way deduce 4 total differential
equations which define the geodetic line; this deduction is given here for
the sake of completeness.
Let λ, be a function of the co-ordinates xν; this defines a series of surfaces
which cut the geodetic line sought-for as well as all neighbouring lines from
P₁ to P₂. We can suppose that all such curves are given when the value of its
co-ordinates xν are given in terms of λ. The sign δ corresponds to a passage
from a point of the geodetic curve sought-for to a point of the contiguous
curve, both lying on the same surface λ.
Then (20) can be replaced by

{ λ₃
{ ∫δω dλ = 0
(20a) { λ₁
{
{ ω² = gμν(dxμ/dλ)(dxν/dλ)

But

δω = (1/ω){½(∂gμν/∂xσ) · (dxμ/dλ) · (dxν/dλ) · δxσ
+ gμν(dxμ/dλ)δ(dxν/dλ)}

So we get by the substitution of δω in (20a), remembering that

δ(dxν/dλ) = (d/dλ)(δxν)

after partial integration,

{ λ₃
{ ∫ dλ kσ δxσ = 0
(20b) { λ₁
{
{ where kσ = (d/dλ){(gμν/ω) · (dxμ/dλ)} - (1/(2ω))(∂gμν/∂xσ

× (dxμ/dλ) · (dxν/dλ).

From which it follows, since the choice of δνσ is perfectly arbitrary that kσ’s
should vanish. Then

(20c) kσ = 0 (σ = 1, 2, 3, 4)

are the equations of geodetic line; since along the geodetic line considered
we have ds ≠ 0, we can choose the parameter λ, as the length of the arc
measured along the geodetic line. Then w = 1, and we would get in place of
(20c)

Or by merely changing the notation suitably,

"20d"

where we have put, following Christoffel,

"21"

Multiply finally (20d) with gστ (outer multiplication with reference to τ, and
inner with respect to σ) we get at last the final form of the equation of the
geodetic line—

Here we have put, following Christoffel,

§ 10. Formation of Tensors through Differentiation.

Relying on the equation of the geodetic line, we can now easily deduce
laws according to which new tensors can be formed from given tensors by
differentiation. For this purpose, we would first establish the general co-
variant differential equations. We achieve this through a repeated
application of the following simple law. If a certain curve be given in our
continuum whose points are characterised by the arc-distances s, measured
from a fixed point on the curve, and if further φ, be an invariant space
function, then dφ/ds is also an invariant. The proof follows from the fact
that dφ as well as ds, are both invariants

Since

so that

is also an invariant for all curves which go out from a point in the
continuum, i.e., for any choice of the vector dxμ. From which follows
immediately that

Aμ = ∂φ/∂xμ

is a co-variant four-vector (gradient of φ).
According to our law, the differential-quotient χ = ∂ψ/∂s taken along any
curve is likewise an invariant.
Substituting the value of ψ, we get

Here however we can not at once deduce the existence of any tensor. If we
however take that the curves along which we are differentiating are
geodesics, we get from it by replacing d²xν/ds² according to (22)

From the interchangeability of the differentiation with regard to μ and ν,
and also according to (23) and (21) we see that the bracket

is symmetrical with respect to μ and ν.
As we can draw a geodetic line in any direction from any point in the
continuum, ∂xμ/ds is thus a four-vector, with an arbitrary ratio of
components, so that it follows from the results of §7 that

"25"

is a co-variant tensor of the second rank. We have thus got the result that
out of the co-variant tensor of the first rank Aμ = ∂φ/∂xμ we can get by
differentiation a co-variant tensor of 2nd rank

"26"

We call the tensor Aμν the “extension” of the tensor Aμ. Then we can easily
show that this combination also leads to a tensor, when the vector Aμ is not

representable as a gradient. In order to see this we first remark that ψ (dφ/
∂xμ) is a co-variant four-vector when ψ and φ are scalars. This is also the
case for a sum of four such terms :—

when ψ(1), φ(1) ... ψ(4), φ(4) are scalars. Now it is however clear that every co-
variant four-vector is representable in the form of Sμ.
If for example, Aμ is a four-vector whose components are any given
functions of xν, we have, (with reference to the chosen co-ordinate system)
only to put

ψ(1) = A₁ φ(1) = x₁

ψ(2) = A₂ φ(2) = x₂

ψ(3) = A₃ φ(3) = x₃

ψ(4) = A₄ φ(4) = x₄.

in order to arrive at the result that Sμ is equal to Aμ.
In order to prove then that Aμν is a tensor when on the right side of (26) we
substitute any co-variant four-vector for Aμ we have only to show that this
is true for the four-vector Sμ. For this latter case, however, a glance on the
right hand side of (26) will show that we have only to bring forth the proof
for the case when

Aμ = ψ ∂φ/∂xμ.

Now the right hand side of (25) multiplied by ψ is

which has a tensor character. Similarly, (∂φ/∂xμ) (∂φ/∂xν) is also a tensor
(outer product of two four-vectors).
Through addition follows the tensor character of

Thus we get the desired proof for the four-vector, ψ ∂φ/∂xμ and hence for
any four-vectors Aμ as shown above.
With the help of the extension of the four-vector, we can easily define
“extension” of a co-variant tensor of any rank. This is a generalisation of
the extension of the four-vector. We confine ourselves to the case of the
extension of the tensors of the 2nd rank for which the law of formation can
be clearly seen.
As already remarked every co-variant tensor of the 2nd rank can be
represented as a sum of the tensors of the type Aμ Bν.
It would therefore be sufficient to deduce the expression of extension, for
one such special tensor. According to (26) we have the expressions

are tensors. Through outer multiplication of the first with Bν and the 2nd
with Aμ we get tensors of the third rank. Their addition gives the tensor of

the third rank

"(27)"

where Aμν is put = Aμ Bν. The right hand side of (27) is linear and
homogeneous with reference to Aμν, and its first differential co-efficient, so
that this law of formation leads to a tensor not only in the case of a tensor of
the type Aμ Bν but also in the case of a summation for all such tensors, i.e.,
in the case of any co-variant tensor of the second rank. We call Aμνσ the
extension of the tensor Aμν. It is clear that (26) and (24) are only special
cases of (27) (extension of the tensors of the first and zero rank). In general
we can get all special laws of formation of tensors from (27) combined with
tensor multiplication.

Some special cases of Particular Importance.

A few auxiliary lemmas concerning the fundamental tensor. We shall first
deduce some of the lemmas much used afterwards. According to the law of
differentiation of determinants, we have

(28) dg = gμν g dgμν = -gμν gdgμν.

The last form follows from the first when we remember that

gμν gμ′ν = δμ′μ , and therefore gμνgμν = 4,

consequently gμνdgμν + gμν dgμν = 0.

From (28), it follows that

"(29)"

Again, since gμν gνσ = δνμ , we have, by differentiation,

By mixed multiplication with gστ and gνλ respectively we obtain (changing
the mode of writing the indices).

dgμν = -gμα gνβ dgαβ

∂gμν/∂xσ = -gμα gνβ dgαβ

and

(32)
dgμν = -gμα gνβ dgαβ

∂gμν/∂xσ = -gμα gνβ ∂gαβ/∂xσ.

The expression (31) allows a transformation which we shall often use;
according to (21)

"(33)"

If we substitute this in the second of the formula (31), we get, remembering
(23),

"(34)"

By substituting the right-hand side of (34) in (29), we get

"(29a)"

Divergence of the contravariant four-vector.

Let us multiply (26) with the contravariant fundamental tensor gμν (inner
multiplication), then by a transformation of the first member, the right-hand
side takes the form

"(A)"

According to (31) and (29), the last member can take the form

"(B)"

Both the first members of the expression (B), and the second member of the
expression (A) cancel each other, since the naming of the summation-
indices is immaterial. The last member of (B) can then be united with first
of (A). If we put

gμν Aμ = Aν,

where Aν as well as Aμ are vectors which can be arbitrarily chosen, we
obtain finally

This scalar is the Divergence of the contravariant four-vector Aν.

Rotation of the (covariant) four-vector.

The second member in (26) is symmetrical in the indices μ, and ν. Hence
Aμν - Aνμ is an antisymmetrical tensor built up in a very simple manner. We
obtain

∂Aμ ∂Aν
(36) Bμν = --------- - -------
∂xν ∂xμ

Antisymmetrical Extension of a Six-vector.

If we apply the operation (27) on an antisymmetrical tensor of the second
rank Aμ{ν²} and form all the equations arising from the cyclic interchange of
the indices μ, ν, σ, and add all them, we obtain a tensor of the third rank

(37) Bμνσ = Aμνσ + Aνσμ + Aσμν

∂Aμν ∂Aνσ ∂Aσμ
= --------- + ---------- + ---------
∂xσ ∂xμ ∂xν

from which it is easy to see that the tensor is antisymmetrical.

Divergence of the Six-vector.

If (27) is multiplied by gμα gνβ (mixed multiplication), then a tensor is
obtained. The first member of the right hand side of (27) can be written in
the form

If we replace gμα gνβ Aμνσ by Aσαβ, gμα gνβ Aμν by Aαβ and replace in the
transformed first member

∂gνβ/∂xσ and ∂gμα/∂xσ

with the help of (34), then from the right-hand side of (27) there arises an
expression with seven terms, of which four cancel. There remains

"(38)"

This is the expression for the extension of a contravariant tensor of the
second rank; extensions can also be formed for corresponding contravariant
tensors of higher and lower ranks.
We remark that in the same way, we can also form the extension of a mixed
tensor Aμα

"(39)"

By the reduction of (38) with reference to the indices β and σ(inner
multiplication with δβσ), we get a contravariant four-vector

On the account of the symmetry of

with reference to the indices β and κ, the third member of the right hand
side vanishes when Aαβ is an antisymmetrical tensor, which we assume here;

the second member can be transformed according to (29a); we therefore get

"(40)"

This is the expression of the divergence of a contravariant six-vector.

Divergence of the mixed tensor of the second rank.

Let us form the reduction of (39) with reference to the indices α and σ, we
obtain remembering (29a)

"(41)"

If we introduce into the last term the contravariant tensor Aρσ = gρτ Aστ, it
takes the form

If further Aρσ or is symmetrical it is reduced to

If instead of Aρσ, we introduce in a similar way the symmetrical co-variant
tensor Aρσ = gρα gσβ Aαβ, then owing to (31) the last member can take the
form

In the symmetrical case treated, (41) can be replaced by either of the forms

"(41a)"

or

"(41b)"

which we shall have to make use of afterwards.

§12. The Riemann-Christoffel Tensor.

We now seek only those tensors, which can be obtained from the
fundamental tensor gμν by differentiation alone. It is found easily. We put in
(27) instead of any tensor Aμν the fundamental tensor gμν and get from it a
new tensor, namely the extension of the fundamental tensor. We can easily
convince ourselves that this vanishes identically. We prove it in the
following way; we substitute in (27)

i.e., the extension of a four-vector.
Thus we get (by slightly changing the indices) the tensor of the third rank

We use these expressions for the formation of the tensor Aμστ - Aμτσ.
Thereby the following terms in Aμστ cancel the corresponding terms in Aμτσ;
the first member, the fourth member, as well as the member corresponding
to the last term within the square bracket. These are all symmetrical in σ,
and τ. The same is true for the sum of the second and third members. We
thus get

"(43)"

The essential thing in this result is that on the right hand side of (42) we
have only Aρ, but not its differential co-efficients. From the tensor-character
of Aμστ - Aμτσ, and from the fact that Aρ is an arbitrary four vector, it
follows, on account of the result of §7, that Bρμστ is a tensor (Riemann-
Christoffel Tensor).
The mathematical significance of this tensor is as follows; when the
continuum is so shaped, that there is a co-ordinate system for which gμν’s
are constants, Bρμστ all vanish.
If we choose instead of the original co-ordinate system any new one, so
would the gμν’s referred to this last system be no longer constants. The
tensor character of Bρμστ shows us, however, that these components vanish
collectively also in any other chosen system of reference. The vanishing of
the Riemann Tensor is thus a necessary condition that for some choice of
the axis-system gμν’s can be taken as constants. In our problem it
corresponds to the case when by a suitable choice of the co-ordinate system,
the special relativity theory holds throughout any finite region. By the
reduction of (43) with reference to indices to τ and ρ, we get the covariant
tensor of the second rank

"(44)"

Remarks upon the choice of co-ordinates.—It has already been remarked in
§8, with reference to the equation (18a), that the co-ordinates can with

advantage be so chosen that √(-g) = 1. A glance at the equations got in the
last two paragraphs shows that, through such a choice, the law of formation
of the tensors suffers a significant simplification. It is specially true for the
tensor Bμν, which plays a fundamental rôle in the theory. By this
simplification, Sμν vanishes of itself so that tensor Bμν reduces to Rμν.
I shall give in the following pages all relations in the simplified form, with
the above-named specialisation of the co-ordinates. It is then very easy to
go back to the general covariant equations, if it appears desirable in any
special case.

C. THE THEORY OF THE GRAVITATION-FIELD

§13. Equation of motion of a material point in a gravitation-field.
Expression for the field-components of gravitation.

A freely moving body not acted on by external forces moves, according to
the special relativity theory, along a straight line and uniformly. This also
holds for the generalised relativity theory for any part of the four-
dimensional region, in which the co-ordinates K0 can be, and are, so chosen
that gμν’s have special constant values of the expression (4).
Let us discuss this motion from the stand-point of any arbitrary co-ordinate-
system K₁; it moves with reference to K₁ (as explained in §2) in a
gravitational field. The laws of motion with reference to K₁ follow easily
from the following consideration. With reference to K₀, the law of motion is
a four-dimensional straight line and thus a geodesic. As a geodetic-line is
defined independently of the system of co-ordinates, it would also be the
law of motion for the motion of the material-point with reference to K₁. If
we put

"(45)"

we get the motion of the point with reference to K₁, given by

"(46)"

We now make the very simple assumption that this general covariant
system of equations defines also the motion of the point in the gravitational
field, when there exists no reference-system K₀, with reference to which the
special relativity theory holds throughout a finite region. The assumption
seems to us to be all the more legitimate, as (46) contains only the first
differentials of gμν, among which there is no relation in the special case
when K₀ exists.
If γμντ’s vanish, the point moves uniformly and in a straight line; these
magnitudes therefore determine the deviation from uniformity. They are the
components of the gravitational field.

§14. The Field-equation of Gravitation in the absence of matter.

In the following, we differentiate gravitation-field from matter in the sense
that everything besides the gravitation-field will be signified as matter;
therefore the term includes not only matter in the usual sense, but also the
electro-dynamic field. Our next problem is to seek the field-equations of
gravitation in the absence of matter. For this we apply the same method as
employed in the foregoing paragraph for the deduction of the equations of
motion for material points. A special case in which the field-equations
sought-for are evidently satisfied is that of the special relativity theory in
which gμν’s have certain constant values. This would be the case in a certain
finite region with reference to a definite co-ordinate system K₀. With
reference to this system, all the components Bρμστ of the Riemann’s Tensor
[equation 43] vanish. These vanish then also in the region considered, with
reference to every other co-ordinate system.

The equations of the gravitation-field free from matter must thus be in
every case satisfied when all Bρμστ vanish. But this condition is clearly one
which goes too far. For it is clear that the gravitation-field generated by a
material point in its own neighbourhood can never be transformed away by
any choice of axes, i.e., it cannot be transformed to a case of constant gμν’s.
Therefore it is clear that, for a gravitational field free from matter, it is
desirable that the symmetrical tensors Bμν deduced from the tensors Bρμστ
should vanish. We thus get 10 equations for 10 quantities gμν which are
fulfilled in the special case when Bρμστ’s all vanish.
Remembering (44) we see that in absence of matter the field-equations
come out as follows; (when referred to the special co-ordinate-system
chosen.)

"(47)"

It can also be shown that the choice of these equations is connected with a
minimum of arbitrariness. For besides Bμν, there is no tensor of the second
rank, which can be built out of gμν’s and their derivatives no higher than the
second, and which is also linear in them.
It will be shown that the equations arising in a purely mathematical way out
of the conditions of the general relativity, together with equations (46), give
us the Newtonian law of attraction as a first approximation, and lead in the
second approximation to the explanation of the perihelion-motion of
mercury discovered by Leverrier (the residual effect which could not be
accounted for by the consideration of all sorts of disturbing factors). My
view is that these are convincing proofs of the physical correctness of my
theory.

§15. Hamiltonian Function for the Gravitation-field.
Laws of Impulse and Energy.

In order to show that the field equations correspond to the laws of impulse
and energy, it is most convenient to write it in the following Hamiltonian
form:—

(47a)

δ∫ Hdτ = 0

H = gμν γαμβ γβνα

√(-g) = 1

Here the variations vanish at the limits of the finite four-dimensional
integration-space considered.
It is first necessary to show that the form (47a) is equivalent to equations
(47). For this purpose, let us consider H as a function of gμν and gμνσ (= ∂gμν/
∂xσ)
We have at first

δH = Γαμβ Γβνα δgμν + 2gμν Γαμβ δΓβνα

= - Γαμβ Γβνα δgμν + 2Γαμβ δ(gμνΓβνα).

But

The terms arising out of the two last terms within the round bracket are of
different signs, and change into one another by the interchange of the
indices μ and β. They cancel each other in the expression for δH, when they
are multiplied by Γμβα, which is symmetrical with respect to μ and β, so that
only the first member of the bracket remains for our consideration.
Remembering (31), we thus have:—

δH = -Γμβα Γναβ δgμν + Γμβα δgαμβ

Therefore

(48)
∂H/∂gμν = -Γμβα Γναβ

∂H/∂gσμν = Γμνσ

If we now carry out the variations in (47a), we obtain the system of
equations

(47b) ∂/∂xα ( ∂H/∂gαμν ) - ∂H/∂gμν = 0,

which, owing to the relations (48), coincide with (47), as was required to be
proved.
If (47b) is multiplied by gσμν, since

∂gσμν/∂xα = ∂gαμν/∂xσ

and consequently

gσμν ∂/∂xα (∂H/∂gαμν) = ∂/∂xα (gσμν ∂H/∂gαμν)
- ∂H/∂gαμν ∂gαμν/∂xσ

we obtain the equation

∂/∂xα (gσμν ∂H/∂gαμν) - ∂H/∂xσ = 0

or

{ ∂tσα/∂xα = 0

(49) { -2κtσα = gσμν ∂H/∂gαμν - δσα H.

Owing to the relations (48), the equations (47) and (34),

(50) κtσα = ½ δσα gμν Γμβα Γναβ
- gμν Γμβα Γνσβ.

It is to be noticed that tσα is not a tensor, so that the equation (49) holds only
for systems for which √-g = 1. This equation expresses the laws of
conservation of impulse and energy in a gravitation-field. In fact, the
integration of this equation over a three-dimensional volume V leads to the
four equations

(49a) d/dx₄ {∫tσ4 dV} = ∫(tσ1 α₁
+ tσ² α₂ + tσ³ α₃)dS

where α₁, α₂, α₂ are the direction-cosines of the inward-drawn normal to the
surface-element dS in the Euclidean Sense. We recognise in this the usual
expression for the laws of conservation. We denote the magnitudes tασ as the
energy-components of the gravitation-field.
I will now put the equation (47) in a third form which will be very
serviceable for a quick realisation of our object. By multiplying the field-
equations (47) with gνσ, these are obtained in the mixed forms. If we
remember that

gνσ ∂Γαμν/∂xα = ∂/∂xα (gνσ Γαμν) - ∂gνσ/∂xα Γαμν,

which owing to (34) is equal to

∂/∂xα (.gνσ Γαμν) - gνβ Γσαβ Γγαμν
- gσβ Γνβα Γαμν,

or slightly altering the notation, equal to

∂/∂xα (gσβ Γαμβ) - gmn Γσmβ Γβnμ
- gνσ Γαμβ Γβνα.

The third member of this expression cancels with the second member of the
field-equations (47). In place of the second term of this expression, we can,
on account of the relations (50), put

κ (tσμ - ½ δσμ t), where t = tαα

Therefore in the place of the equations (47), we obtain

(51) { ∂/∂xα (gσβ Γαμβ) = -κ(tσμ - ½ δσμ t)

{ √(-g) = 1.

§16. General formulation of the field-equation of Gravitation.

The field-equations established in the preceding paragraph for spaces free
from matter is to be compared with the equation ▽²φ = 0 of the Newtonian
theory. We have now to find the equations which will correspond to
Poisson’s Equation ▽²φ = 4πκρ (ρ signifies the density of matter).

The special relativity theory has led to the conception that the inertial mass
(Träge Masse) is no other than energy. It can also be fully expressed
mathematically by a symmetrical tensor of the second rank, the energy-
tensor. We have therefore to introduce in our generalised theory energy-
tensor τασ associated with matter, which like the energy components tασ of
the gravitation-field (equations 49, and 50) have a mixed character but
which however can be connected with symmetrical covariant tensors. The
equation (51) teaches us how to introduce the energy-tensor (corresponding
to the density of Poisson’s equation) in the field equations of gravitation. If
we consider a complete system (for example the Solar-system) its total
mass, as also its total gravitating action, will depend on the total energy of
the system, ponderable as well as gravitational. This can be expressed, by
putting in (51), in place of energy-components tμσ of gravitation-field alone
the sum of the energy-components of matter and gravitation, i.e.,

t μσ + Tμσ .

We thus get instead of (51), the tensor-equation

"(52)"

where T = Tμμ (Laue’s Scalar). These are the general field-equations of
gravitation in the mixed form. In place of (47), we get by working
backwards the system

"(53)"

It must be admitted, that this introduction of the energy-tensor of matter
cannot be justified by means of the Relativity-Postulate alone; for we have
in the foregoing analysis deduced it from the condition that the energy of
the gravitation-field should exert gravitating action in the same way as
every other kind of energy. The strongest ground for the choice of the above
equation however lies in this, that they lead, as their consequences, to
equations expressing the conservation of the components of total energy
(the impulses and the energy) which exactly correspond to the equations
(49) and (49a). This shall be shown afterwards.

§17. The laws of conservation in the general case.

The equations (52) can be easily so transformed that the second member on
the right-hand side vanishes. We reduce (52) with reference to the indices μ
and σ and subtract the equation so obtained after multiplication with ½ δμσ
from (52).
We obtain,

(52a) ∂/∂xα(gσβ Γμβα - ½ δμσ gλβ Γλβα)
= -κ(tμσ + Tμσ)

we operate on it by ∂/∂xσ. Now,

∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβΓμβα)
= -½ ∂²/∂xα∂xσ [gσβ gαλ(∂gμλ/∂xβ
+ ∂gβλ/∂xμ - ∂gμβ/∂xλ)].

The first and the third member of the round bracket lead to expressions
which cancel one another, as can be easily seen by interchanging the
summation-indices α, and σ, on the one hand, and β and λ, on the other.
The second term can be transformed according to (31). So that we get,

(54) ∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβγμβα)
= ½ ∂³gαβ/∂xσ∂xβ∂xμ

The second member of the expression on the left-hand side of (52a) leads
first to

- ½ ∂²/∂xα∂xμ (gλβΓλβα) or

to 1/4 ∂²/∂xα∂xμ [gλβgαδ( ∂gδλ/∂xβ
+ ∂gδβ/∂xλ - ∂gλβ/∂xδ)].

The expression arising out of the last member within the round bracket
vanishes according to (29) on account of the choice of axes. The two others
can be taken together and give us on account of (31), the expression

-½ ∂³gαβ/∂xα∂xβ∂xμ

So that remembering (54) we have

(55) ∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβΓμβα
- ½ δμσ gλβ Γλβα) = 0.

identically.
From (55) and (52a) it follows that

(56) ∂/∂xσ (tμσ + Tμσ) = 0

From the field equations of gravitation, it also follows that the
conservation-laws of impulse and energy are satisfied. We see it most
simply following the same reasoning which lead to equations (49a); only
instead of the energy-components of the gravitational-field, we are to
introduce the total energy-components of matter and gravitational field.

§18. The Impulse-energy law for matter as a consequence of the field-
equations.

If we multiply (53) with ∂gμν/∂xσ, we get in a way similar to §15,
remembering that

gμν ∂gμν/∂xσ vanishes,

the equations ∂tσα/∂xα - ½ ∂gμν/∂xσ Tμν = 0

or remembering (56)

(57) ∂Tσα/∂xα + ½ ∂gμν/∂xσ Tμν = 0

A comparison with (41b) shows that these equations for the above choice of
co-ordinates (√(-g) = 1) asserts nothing but the vanishing of the divergence
of the tensor of the energy-components of matter.
Physically the appearance of the second term on the left-hand side shows
that for matter alone the law of conservation of impulse and energy cannot
hold; or can only hold when gμν’s are constants; i.e., when the field of
gravitation vanishes. The second member is an expression for impulse and
energy which the gravitation-field exerts per time and per volume upon
matter. This comes out clearer when instead of (57) we write it in the form
of (47).

(57a) ∂Tσα/∂xα = -Γσβα Tαβ.

The right-hand side expresses the interaction of the energy of the
gravitational-field on matter. The field-equations of gravitation contain thus
at the same time 4 conditions which are to be satisfied by all material
phenomena. We get the equations of the material phenomena completely
when the latter is characterised by four other differential equations
independent of one another.

D. THE “MATERIAL” PHENOMENA.

The Mathematical auxiliaries developed under ‘B’ at once enables us to
generalise, according to the generalised theory of relativity, the physical
laws of matter (Hydrodynamics, Maxwell’s Electro-dynamics) as they lie
already formulated according to the special-relativity-theory. The
generalised Relativity Principle leads us to no further limitation of
possibilities; but it enables us to know exactly the influence of gravitation
on all processes without the introduction of any new hypothesis.
It is owing to this, that as regards the physical nature of matter (in a narrow
sense) no definite necessary assumptions are to be introduced. The question
may lie open whether the theories of the electro-magnetic field and the
gravitational-field together, will form a sufficient basis for the theory of
matter. The general relativity postulate can teach us no new principle. But
by building up the theory it must be shown whether electro-magnetism and
gravitation together can achieve what the former alone did not succeed in
doing.

§19. Euler’s equations for frictionless adiabatic liquid.

Let p and ρ, be two scalars, of which the first denotes the pressure and the
last the density of the fluid; between them there is a relation. Let the
contravariant symmetrical tensor

Tαβ = -gαβ p + ρ dxα/ds dxβ/ds (58)

be the contra-variant energy-tensor of the liquid. To it also belongs the
covariant tensor

(58a) Tμν = -gμν p + gμα dxα/ds gμβ dxβ/ds ρ

as well as the mixed tensor

(58b) Tασ = -δασ p + gσβ dxβ/ds dxα/ds ρ.

If we put the right-hand side of (58b) in (57a) we get the general
hydrodynamical equations of Euler according to the generalised relativity
theory. This in principle completely solves the problem of motion; for the
four equations (57a) together with the given equation between p and ρ, and
the equation

gαβ dx_α/ds dxβ/ds = 1,

are sufficient, with the given values of gαβ, for finding out the six unknowns

p, ρ, dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds dx₄/ds.

If gμν’s are unknown we have also to take the equations (53). There are now
11 equations for finding out 10 functions g, so that the number is more than
sufficient. Now it is be noticed that the equation (57a) is already contained
in (53), so that the latter only represents (7) independent equations. This
indefiniteness is due to the wide freedom in the choice of co-ordinates, so
that mathematically the problem is indefinite in the sense that three of the
space-functions can be arbitrarily chosen.

§20. Maxwell’s Electro-Magnetic field-equations.

Let φν be the components of a covariant four-vector, the electro-magnetic
potential; from it let us form according to (36) the components Fρσ of the
covariant six-vector of the electro-magnetic field according to the system of
equations

(59) Fρσ = ∂φρ/∂xσ - ∂φσ/∂xρ.

From (59), it follows that the system of equations

(60) ∂Fρσ/∂xτ + ∂Fστ/∂xρ + ∂Fτρ/∂xσ = 0

is satisfied of which the left-hand side, according to (37), is an anti-
symmetrical tensor of the third kind. This system (60) contains essentially
four equations, which can be thus written:—

{ ∂F₂₃/∂x₄ + ∂F₃₄/∂x₂ ∂F₄₂/∂x₃ = 0
{
{ ∂F₃₄/∂x₁ + ∂F₄₁/∂x₃ ∂F₁₃/∂x₄ = 0
(60a) {
{ ∂F₄₁/∂x₂ + ∂F₁₂/∂x₄ ∂F₂₄/∂x₁ = 0
{
{ ∂F₁₂/∂x₃ + ∂F₂₃/∂x₁ ∂F₃₁/∂x₂ = 0.

This system of equations corresponds to the second system of equations of
Maxwell. We see it at once if we put

{ F₂₃ = Hx F₁₄ = Ex
{
(61) { F₃₁ = Hy F₂₄ = Ey
{
{ F₁₂ = Hz F₃₄ = Ez

Instead of (60a) we can therefore write according to the usual notation of
three-dimensional vector-analysis:—

{ ∂H/∂t + rot E = 0
(60b) {
{ div H = 0.

The first Maxwellian system is obtained by a generalisation of the form
given by Minkowski.

We introduce the contra-variant six-vector Fαβ by the equation

(62) Fμν = gμα gνβ Fαβ,

and also a contra-variant four-vector Jμ, which is the electrical current-
density in vacuum. Then remembering (40) we can establish the system of
equations, which remains invariant for any substitution with determinant 1
(according to our choice of co-ordinates).

(63) ∂Fμν/∂xν = Jμ

If we put

{ F²³ = H′x F¹⁴ = -E′x
{
(64) { F³¹ = H′y F²⁴ = -E′y
{
{ F¹² = H′z F³⁴ = -E′z

which quantities become equal to Hx ... Ex in the case of the special
relativity theory, and besides

J1 = ix ... J4 = ρ

we get instead of (63)

{ rot H′ - ∂E′/∂t = i
(63a) {
{ div E′ = ρ

The equations (60), (62) and (63) give thus a generalisation of Maxwell’s
field-equations in vacuum, which remains true in our chosen system of co-
ordinates.

The energy-components of the electro-magnetic field.

Let us form the inner-product

(65) Kσ = Fσμ Jμ.

According to (61) its components can be written down in the three-
dimensional notation.

{ K₁ = ρEx + [i, H]x

(65a) { — — —

{ K₄ = — (i, E).

Kσ is a covariant four-vector whose components are equal to the negative
impulse and energy which are transferred to the electro-magnetic field per
unit of time, and per unit of volume, by the electrical masses. If the
electrical masses be free, that is, under the influence of the electro-magnetic
field only, then the covariant four-vector Kσ will vanish.
In order to get the energy components Tσν of the electro-magnetic field, we
require only to give to the equation Kσ = 0, the form of the equation (57).
From (63) and (65) we get first,

Kσ = Fσμ ∂Fμν/∂xν

= ∂/∂xν (Fσμ Fμν) - Fμν ∂Fσμ/∂xν.

On account of (60) the second member on the right-hand side admits of the
transformation—

Fμν ∂Fσμ/∂xν = -½ Fμν ∂Fμν/∂xσ

= -½ gμα gνβ Fαβ ∂Fμν/∂xσ.

Owing to symmetry, this expression can also be written in the form

= -1/4 [gμα gνβ Fαβ ∂Fμν/∂xσ

+ gμα gνβ ∂Fαβ/∂xσ Fμν],

which can also be put in the form

- 1/4 ∂/∂xσ (gμα gνβ Fαβ Fμν)

+ 1/4 Fαβ Fμν ∂/∂xσ (gμα gνβ).

The first of these terms can be written shortly as

- 1/4 ∂/∂xσ (Fμν Fμν),

and the second after differentiation can be transformed in the form

- ½ Fμτ Fμν gνρ ∂gστ/∂xσ.

If we take all the three terms together, we get the relation

(66) Kσ = ∂τσν/∂xν - ½ gτμ ∂gμν/∂xσ ττν

where

(66a) τσν = -Fσα Fνα + 1/4 δσν Fαβ Fαβ.

On account of (30) the equation (66) becomes equivalent to (57) and (57a)
when Kσ vanishes. Thus τσν’s are the energy-components of the electro-
magnetic field. With the help of (61) and (64) we can easily show that the
energy-components of the electro-magnetic field, in the case of the special
relativity theory, give rise to the well-known Maxwell-Poynting
expressions.
We have now deduced the most general laws which the gravitation-field
and matter satisfy when we use a co-ordinate system for which √(-g) = 1.
Thereby we achieve an important simplification in all our formulas and
calculations, without renouncing the conditions of general covariance, as
we have obtained the equations through a specialisation of the co-ordinate
system from the general covariant-equations. Still the question is not
without formal interest, whether, when the energy-components of the
gravitation-field and matter is defined in a generalised manner without any
specialisation of co-ordinates, the laws of conservation have the form of the
equation (56), and the field-equations of gravitation hold in the form (52) or
(52a); such that on the left-hand side, we have a divergence in the usual
sense, and on the right-hand side, the sum of the energy-components of
matter and gravitation. I have found out that this is indeed the case. But I
am of opinion that the communication of my rather comprehensive work on
this subject will not pay, for nothing essentially new comes out of it.

E. §21. Newton’s theory as a first approximation.

We have already mentioned several times that the special relativity theory is
to be looked upon as a special case of the general, in which gμν’s have
constant values (4). This signifies, according to what has been said before, a
total neglect of the influence of gravitation. We get one important
approximation if we consider the case when gμν’s differ from (4) only by
small magnitudes (compared to 1) where we can neglect small quantities of
the second and higher orders (first aspect of the approximation.)
Further it should be assumed that within the space-time region considered,
gμν’s at infinite distances (using the word infinite in a spatial sense) can, by
a suitable choice of co-ordinates, tend to the limiting values (4); i.e., we
consider only those gravitational fields which can be regarded as produced
by masses distributed over finite regions.
We can assume that this approximation should lead to Newton’s theory. For
it however, it is necessary to treat the fundamental equations from another
point of view. Let us consider the motion of a particle according to the
equation (46). In the case of the special relativity theory, the components

dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds,

can take any values. This signifies that any velocity

v = √((dx₁/dx₄)² + (dx₂/dx₄)² + (dx₃/dx₄)²)

can appear which is less than the velocity of light in vacuum (v < 1). If we
finally limit ourselves to the consideration of the case when v is small
compared to the velocity of light, it signifies that the components

dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds,

can be treated as small quantities, whereas dx₄/ds is equal to 1, up to the
second-order magnitudes (the second point of view for approximation).
Now we see that, according to the first view of approximation, the
magnitudes γμντ’s are all small quantities of at least the first order. A glance
at (46) will also show, that in this equation according to the second view of
approximation, we are only to take into account those terms for which μ = ν
= 4.
By limiting ourselves only to terms of the lowest order we get instead of
(46), first, the equations:—

d²xτ/dt² = Γ₄₄τ, where ds = dx₄ = dt,

or by limiting ourselves only to those terms which according to the first
stand-point are approximations of the first order,
It must be admitted, that this introduction of the energy-tensor of matter
cannot be justified by means of the Relativity-Postulate alone; for we have
in the foregoing analysis deduced it from the condition that the energy of
the gravitation-field should exert gravitating action in the same way as
every other kind of energy. The strongest ground for the choice of the above
equation however lies in this, that they lead, as their consequences, to
equations expressing the conservation of the components of total energy
(the impulses and the energy) which exactly correspond to the equations
(49) and (49a). This shall be shown afterwards.

§17. The laws of conservation in the general case.

The equations (52) can be easily so transformed that the second member on
the right-hand side vanishes. We reduce (52) with reference to the indices μ
and σ and subtract the equation so obtained after multiplication with ½ δμσ
from (52).
We obtain,

(52a) ∂/∂xα(gσβ Γμβα - ½ δμσ gλβ Γλβα)
= -κ(tμσ + Tμσ)

we operate on it by ∂/∂xσ. Now,

∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβΓμβα)
= -½ ∂²/∂xα∂xσ [gσβ gαλ(∂gμλ/∂xβ
+ ∂gβλ/∂xμ - ∂gμβ/∂xλ)].

The first and the third member of the round bracket lead to expressions
which cancel one another, as can be easily seen by interchanging the
summation-indices α, and σ, on the one hand, and β and λ, on the other.
The second term can be transformed according to (31). So that we get,

(54) ∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβγμβα)
= ½ ∂³gαβ/∂xσ∂xβ∂xμ

The second member of the expression on the left-hand side of (52a) leads
first to

- ½ ∂²/∂xα∂xμ (gλβΓλβα) or

to 1/4 ∂²/∂xα∂xμ [gλβgαδ( ∂gδλ/∂xβ
+ ∂gδβ/∂xλ - ∂gλβ/∂xδ)].

The expression arising out of the last member within the round bracket
vanishes according to (29) on account of the choice of axes. The two others
can be taken together and give us on account of (31), the expression

-½ ∂³gαβ/∂xα∂xβ∂xμ

So that remembering (54) we have

(55) ∂²/∂xα∂xσ (gσβΓμβα
- ½ δμσ gλβ Γλβα) = 0.

identically.
From (55) and (52a) it follows that

(56) ∂/∂xσ (tμσ + Tμσ) = 0

From the field equations of gravitation, it also follows that the
conservation-laws of impulse and energy are satisfied. We see it most
simply following the same reasoning which lead to equations (49a); only
instead of the energy-components of the gravitational-field, we are to
introduce the total energy-components of matter and gravitational field.

§18. The Impulse-energy law for matter as a consequence of the field-
equations.

If we multiply (53) with ∂gμν/∂xσ, we get in a way similar to §15,
remembering that

gμν ∂gμν/∂xσ vanishes,

the equations ∂tσα/∂xα - ½ ∂gμν/∂xσ Tμν = 0

or remembering (56)

(57) ∂Tσα/∂xα + ½ ∂gμν/∂xσ Tμν = 0

A comparison with (41b) shows that these equations for the above choice of
co-ordinates (√(-g) = 1) asserts nothing but the vanishing of the divergence
of the tensor of the energy-components of matter.

Physically the appearance of the second term on the left-hand side shows
that for matter alone the law of conservation of impulse and energy cannot
hold; or can only hold when gμν’s are constants; i.e., when the field of
gravitation vanishes. The second member is an expression for impulse and
energy which the gravitation-field exerts per time and per volume upon
matter. This comes out clearer when instead of (57) we write it in the form
of (47).

(57a) ∂Tσα/∂xα = -Γσβα Tαβ.

The right-hand side expresses the interaction of the energy of the
gravitational-field on matter. The field-equations of gravitation contain thus
at the same time 4 conditions which are to be satisfied by all material
phenomena. We get the equations of the material phenomena completely
when the latter is characterised by four other differential equations
independent of one another.

D. THE “MATERIAL” PHENOMENA.

The Mathematical auxiliaries developed under ‘B’ at once enables us to
generalise, according to the generalised theory of relativity, the physical
laws of matter (Hydrodynamics, Maxwell’s Electro-dynamics) as they lie
already formulated according to the special-relativity-theory. The
generalised Relativity Principle leads us to no further limitation of
possibilities; but it enables us to know exactly the influence of gravitation
on all processes without the introduction of any new hypothesis.
It is owing to this, that as regards the physical nature of matter (in a narrow
sense) no definite necessary assumptions are to be introduced. The question
may lie open whether the theories of the electro-magnetic field and the
gravitational-field together, will form a sufficient basis for the theory of
matter. The general relativity postulate can teach us no new principle. But
by building up the theory it must be shown whether electro-magnetism and
gravitation together can achieve what the former alone did not succeed in
doing.

§19. Euler’s equations for frictionless adiabatic liquid.

Let p and ρ, be two scalars, of which the first denotes the pressure and the
last the density of the fluid; between them there is a relation. Let the
contravariant symmetrical tensor

Tαβ = -gαβ p + ρ dxα/ds dxβ/ds (58)

be the contra-variant energy-tensor of the liquid. To it also belongs the
covariant tensor

(58a) Tμν = -gμν p + gμα dxα/ds gμβ dxβ/ds ρ

as well as the mixed tensor

(58b) Tασ = -δασ p + gσβ dxβ/ds dxα/ds ρ.

If we put the right-hand side of (58b) in (57a) we get the general
hydrodynamical equations of Euler according to the generalised relativity
theory. This in principle completely solves the problem of motion; for the
four equations (57a) together with the given equation between p and ρ, and
the equation

gαβ dx_α/ds dxβ/ds = 1,

are sufficient, with the given values of gαβ, for finding out the six unknowns

p, ρ, dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds dx₄/ds.

If gμν’s are unknown we have also to take the equations (53). There are now
11 equations for finding out 10 functions g, so that the number is more than
sufficient. Now it is be noticed that the equation (57a) is already contained
in (53), so that the latter only represents (7) independent equations. This
indefiniteness is due to the wide freedom in the choice of co-ordinates, so
that mathematically the problem is indefinite in the sense that three of the
space-functions can be arbitrarily chosen.

§20. Maxwell’s Electro-Magnetic field-equations.

Let φν be the components of a covariant four-vector, the electro-magnetic
potential; from it let us form according to (36) the components Fρσ of the
covariant six-vector of the electro-magnetic field according to the system of
equations

(59) Fρσ = ∂φρ/∂xσ - ∂φσ/∂xρ.

From (59), it follows that the system of equations

(60) ∂Fρσ/∂xτ + ∂Fστ/∂xρ + ∂Fτρ/∂xσ = 0

is satisfied of which the left-hand side, according to (37), is an anti-
symmetrical tensor of the third kind. This system (60) contains essentially
four equations, which can be thus written:—

{ ∂F₂₃/∂x₄ + ∂F₃₄/∂x₂ ∂F₄₂/∂x₃ = 0
{
{ ∂F₃₄/∂x₁ + ∂F₄₁/∂x₃ ∂F₁₃/∂x₄ = 0
(60a) {
{ ∂F₄₁/∂x₂ + ∂F₁₂/∂x₄ ∂F₂₄/∂x₁ = 0
{
{ ∂F₁₂/∂x₃ + ∂F₂₃/∂x₁ ∂F₃₁/∂x₂ = 0.

This system of equations corresponds to the second system of equations of
Maxwell. We see it at once if we put

{ F₂₃ = Hx F₁₄ = Ex
{
(61) { F₃₁ = Hy F₂₄ = Ey
{
{ F₁₂ = Hz F₃₄ = Ez

Instead of (60a) we can therefore write according to the usual notation of
three-dimensional vector-analysis:—

{ ∂H/∂t + rot E = 0
(60b) {
{ div H = 0.

The first Maxwellian system is obtained by a generalisation of the form
given by Minkowski.

We introduce the contra-variant six-vector Fαβ by the equation

(62) Fμν = gμα gνβ Fαβ,

and also a contra-variant four-vector Jμ, which is the electrical current-
density in vacuum. Then remembering (40) we can establish the system of
equations, which remains invariant for any substitution with determinant 1
(according to our choice of co-ordinates).

(63) ∂Fμν/∂xν = Jμ

If we put

{ F²³ = H′x F¹⁴ = -E′x
{
(64) { F³¹ = H′y F²⁴ = -E′y
{
{ F¹² = H′z F³⁴ = -E′z

which quantities become equal to Hx ... Ex in the case of the special
relativity theory, and besides

J1 = ix ... J4 = ρ

we get instead of (63)

{ rot H′ - ∂E′/∂t = i
(63a) {
{ div E′ = ρ

The equations (60), (62) and (63) give thus a generalisation of Maxwell’s
field-equations in vacuum, which remains true in our chosen system of co-
ordinates.

The energy-components of the electro-magnetic field.

Let us form the inner-product

(65) Kσ = Fσμ Jμ.

According to (61) its components can be written down in the three-
dimensional notation.

{ K₁ = ρEx + [i, H]x

(65a) { — — —

{ K₄ = — (i, E).

Kσ is a covariant four-vector whose components are equal to the negative
impulse and energy which are transferred to the electro-magnetic field per
unit of time, and per unit of volume, by the electrical masses. If the
electrical masses be free, that is, under the influence of the electro-magnetic
field only, then the covariant four-vector Kσ will vanish.
In order to get the energy components Tσν of the electro-magnetic field, we
require only to give to the equation Kσ = 0, the form of the equation (57).
From (63) and (65) we get first,

Kσ = Fσμ ∂Fμν/∂xν

= ∂/∂xν (Fσμ Fμν) - Fμν ∂Fσμ/∂xν.

On account of (60) the second member on the right-hand side admits of the
transformation—

Fμν ∂Fσμ/∂xν = -½ Fμν ∂Fμν/∂xσ

= -½ gμα gνβ Fαβ ∂Fμν/∂xσ.

Owing to symmetry, this expression can also be written in the form

= -1/4 [gμα gνβ Fαβ ∂Fμν/∂xσ

+ gμα gνβ ∂Fαβ/∂xσ Fμν],

which can also be put in the form

- 1/4 ∂/∂xσ (gμα gνβ Fαβ Fμν)

+ 1/4 Fαβ Fμν ∂/∂xσ (gμα gνβ).

The first of these terms can be written shortly as

- 1/4 ∂/∂xσ (Fμν Fμν),

and the second after differentiation can be transformed in the form

- ½ Fμτ Fμν gνρ ∂gστ/∂xσ.

If we take all the three terms together, we get the relation

(66) Kσ = ∂τσν/∂xν - ½ gτμ ∂gμν/∂xσ ττν

where

(66a) τσν = -Fσα Fνα + 1/4 δσν Fαβ Fαβ.

On account of (30) the equation (66) becomes equivalent to (57) and (57a)
when Kσ vanishes. Thus τσν’s are the energy-components of the electro-
magnetic field. With the help of (61) and (64) we can easily show that the
energy-components of the electro-magnetic field, in the case of the special
relativity theory, give rise to the well-known Maxwell-Poynting
expressions.
We have now deduced the most general laws which the gravitation-field
and matter satisfy when we use a co-ordinate system for which √(-g) = 1.
Thereby we achieve an important simplification in all our formulas and
calculations, without renouncing the conditions of general covariance, as
we have obtained the equations through a specialisation of the co-ordinate
system from the general covariant-equations. Still the question is not
without formal interest, whether, when the energy-components of the
gravitation-field and matter is defined in a generalised manner without any
specialisation of co-ordinates, the laws of conservation have the form of the
equation (56), and the field-equations of gravitation hold in the form (52) or
(52a); such that on the left-hand side, we have a divergence in the usual
sense, and on the right-hand side, the sum of the energy-components of
matter and gravitation. I have found out that this is indeed the case. But I
am of opinion that the communication of my rather comprehensive work on
this subject will not pay, for nothing essentially new comes out of it.

E. §21. Newton’s theory as a first approximation.

We have already mentioned several times that the special relativity theory is
to be looked upon as a special case of the general, in which gμν’s have
constant values (4). This signifies, according to what has been said before, a
total neglect of the influence of gravitation. We get one important
approximation if we consider the case when gμν’s differ from (4) only by
small magnitudes (compared to 1) where we can neglect small quantities of
the second and higher orders (first aspect of the approximation.)
Further it should be assumed that within the space-time region considered,
gμν’s at infinite distances (using the word infinite in a spatial sense) can, by
a suitable choice of co-ordinates, tend to the limiting values (4); i.e., we
consider only those gravitational fields which can be regarded as produced
by masses distributed over finite regions.
We can assume that this approximation should lead to Newton’s theory. For
it however, it is necessary to treat the fundamental equations from another
point of view. Let us consider the motion of a particle according to the
equation (46). In the case of the special relativity theory, the components

dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds,

can take any values. This signifies that any velocity

v = √((dx₁/dx₄)² + (dx₂/dx₄)² + (dx₃/dx₄)²)

can appear which is less than the velocity of light in vacuum (v < 1). If we
finally limit ourselves to the consideration of the case when v is small
compared to the velocity of light, it signifies that the components

dx₁/ds, dx₂/ds, dx₃/ds,

can be treated as small quantities, whereas dx₄/ds is equal to 1, up to the
second-order magnitudes (the second point of view for approximation).
Now we see that, according to the first view of approximation, the
magnitudes γμντ’s are all small quantities of at least the first order. A glance
at (46) will also show, that in this equation according to the second view of
approximation, we are only to take into account those terms for which μ = ν
= 4.
By limiting ourselves only to terms of the lowest order we get instead of
(46), first, the equations:—

d²xτ/dt² = Γ₄₄τ, where ds = dx₄ = dt,

or by limiting ourselves only to those terms which according to the first
stand-point are approximations of the first order,

If we further assume that the gravitation-field is quasi-static, i.e., it is
limited only to the case when the matter producing the gravitation-field is
moving slowly (relative to the velocity of light) we can neglect the
differentiations of the positional co-ordinates on the right-hand side with
respect to time, so that we get

(67) d²xτ/dt² = -½ ∂g₄₄/∂xτ (τ, = 1, 2, 3)

This is the equation of motion of a material point according to Newton’s
theory, where g₄₄/₂ plays the part of gravitational potential. The remarkable
thing in the result is that in the first-approximation of motion of the material
point, only the component g₄₄ of the fundamental tensor appears.

Let us now turn to the field-equation (53). In this case, we have to
remember that the energy-tensor of matter is exclusively defined in a
narrow sense by the density ρ of matter, i.e., by the second member on the
right-hand side of 58 [(58a, or 58b)]. If we make the necessary
approximations, then all component vanish except

τ₄₄ = ρ = τ.

On the left-hand side of (53) the second term is an infinitesimal of the
second order, so that the first leads to the following terms in the
approximation, which are rather interesting for us:

By neglecting all differentiations with regard to time, this leads, when μ = ν
=4, to the expression

The last of the equations (53) thus leads to

(68) ▽² g₄₄ = κρ.

The equations (67) and (68) together, are equivalent to Newton’s law of
gravitation.
For the gravitation-potential we get from (67) and (68) the exp.

(68a.) -κ/(8π) ∫ ρdτ/r

whereas the Newtonian theory for the chosen unit of time gives

-K/c² ∫ρdτ/r,

where K denotes usually the gravitation-constant. 6.7 x 10⁻⁸; equating them
we get

(69) κ = 8πK/c² = 1.87 x 10⁻²⁷.

§22. Behaviour of measuring rods and clocks in a statical gravitation-field.
Curvature of light-rays. Perihelion-motion of the paths of the Planets.

In order to obtain Newton’s theory as a first approximation we had to
calculate only g₄₄, out of the 10 components gμν of the gravitation-potential,
for that is the only component which comes in the first approximate
equations of motion of a material point in a gravitational field.
We see however, that the other components of gμν should also differ from
the values given in (4) as required by the condition g = -1.
For a heavy particle at the origin of co-ordinates and generating the
gravitational field, we get as a first approximation the symmetrical solution
of the equation:—

{ gρσ = -δρσ - α(xρ xσ)/r³ (ρ and σ 1, 2, 3)
{
(70) { gρ4 = g4ρ = 0 (ρ 1, 2, 3)
{
{ g₄₄ = 1 - α/r.

δρσ is 1 or 0, according as ρ = σ or not and r is the quantity

+√(x₁² + x₂² + x₃²).

On account of (68a) we have

(70a) α = κM/4π

where M denotes the mass generating the field. It is easy to verify that this
solution satisfies approximately the field-equation outside the mass M.
Let us now investigate the influences which the field of mass M will have
upon the metrical properties of the field. Between the lengths and times
measured locally on the one hand, and the differences in co-ordinates dxν on
the other, we have the relation

ds² = gμν dxμ dxν.

For a unit measuring rod, for example, placed parallel to the x axis, we have
to put

ds² = -1, dx₂ = dx₃ = dx₄ = 0

then -1 = g₁₁dx₁².

If the unit measuring rod lies on the x axis, the first of the equations (70)
gives

g₁₁ = -(1 + α/r).

From both these relations it follows as a first approximation that

(71) dx = 1 - α/2r.

The unit measuring rod appears, when referred to the co-ordinate-system,
shortened by the calculated magnitude through the presence of the
gravitational field, when we place it radially in the field.
Similarly we can get its co-ordinate-length in a tangential position, if we put
for example

ds² = -1, dx₁ = dx₃ = dx₄ = 0, x₁ = r, x₂ = x₃ = 0

we then get

(71a) -1 = g₂₂ dx₂² = -dx₂².

The gravitational field has no influence upon the length of the rod, when we
put it tangentially in the field.
Thus Euclidean geometry does not hold in the gravitational field even in the
first approximation, if we conceive that one and the same rod independent
of its position and its orientation can serve as the measure of the same
extension. But a glance at (70a) and (69) shows that the expected difference
is much too small to be noticeable in the measurement of earth’s surface.
We would further investigate the rate of going of a unit-clock which is
placed in a statical gravitational field. Here we have for a period of the
clock

ds = 1, dx₁ = dx₂ dx₃ = 0;

then we have

1 = g₄₄dx₄²

dx₄ = 1/√(g₄₄) = 1/√(1 + (g₄₄ - 1)) = 1 - (g₄₄ - 1)/2

or dx₄ = 1 + k/8π ∫ ρdτ/r.

Therefore the clock goes slowly what it is placed in the neighbourhood of
ponderable masses. It follows from this that the spectral lines in the light
coming to us from the surfaces of big stars should appear shifted towards
the red end of the spectrum.
Let us further investigate the path of light-rays in a statical gravitational
field. According to the special relativity theory, the velocity of light is given

by the equation

-dx₁² - dx₂² - dx₃² + dx₄² = 0;

thus also according to the generalised relativity theory it is given by the
equation

(73) ds² = gμν dxμ dxν = 0.

If the direction, i.e., the ratio dx₁ : dx₂ : dx₃ is given, the equation (73) gives
the magnitudes

dx₁/dx₄, dx₂/dx₄, dx₃/dx₄,

and with it the velocity,

√((dx₁/dx₄)² + (dx₂/dx₄)² + (dx₃/dx₄)²) = γ,

in the sense of the Euclidean Geometry. We can easily see that, with
reference to the co-ordinate system, the rays of light must appear curved in
case gμν’s are not constants. If n be the direction perpendicular to the
direction of propagation, we have, from Huygen’s principle, that light-rays
(taken in the plane (γ, n)] must suffer a curvature ∂λ/∂n.
Let us find out the curvature which a light-ray suffers when it goes by a
mass M at a distance Δ from it. If we use the co-ordinate system according
to the above scheme, then the total bending B of light-rays (reckoned
positive when it is concave to the origin) is given as a sufficient
approximation by

B = ∫-∞∞ ∂γ/∂[x]₁ dx₂

where (73) and (70) gives

γ = √(-g₄₄/g₂₂) = 1 - α/2r (1 + x₂²/r²).

The calculation gives

B = 2α/Δ = KM/2πΔ.

A ray of light just grazing the sun would suffer a bending of 1·7″, whereas
one coming by Jupiter would have a deviation of about ·02″.
If we calculate the gravitation-field to a greater order of approximation and
with it the corresponding path of a material particle of a relatively small
(infinitesimal) mass we get a deviation of the following kind from the
Kepler-Newtonian Laws of Planetary motion. The Ellipse of Planetary
motion suffers a slow rotation in the direction of motion, of amount

(75) s = 24π³a²/τ²c²(1 - e²) per revolution.

In this Formula ‘a’ signifies the semi-major axis, c, the velocity of light,
measured in the usual way, e, the eccentricity, τ, the time of revolution in
seconds.
The calculation gives for the planet Mercury, a rotation of path of amount
43″ per century, corresponding sufficiently to what has been found by
astronomers (Leverrier). They found a residual perihelion motion of this
planet of the given magnitude which can not be explained by the
perturbation of the other planets.

NOTES

Note 1.

The fundamental electro-magnetic equations of Maxwell for stationary
media are:—

curl H = 1/c (∂D/∂t + ρν) (1)

curl E = -1/c ∂B/∂t (2)

div D = ρ
B = μH
div B = 0
D = kE

According to Hertz and Heaviside, these require modification in the case of
moving bodies.
Now it is known that due to motion alone there is a change in a vector R
given by

(∂R/∂t) due to motion = u. div R + curl [Ru]

where u is the vector velocity of the moving body and [Ru] the vector
product of R and u.
Hence equations (1) and (2) become

c curl H = ∂D/∂t + u div D + curl Vect. [Du] + ρν (1·1)

and

-c curl E = ∂B/∂t + u div B + curl Vect. [Bu] (2·1)

which gives finally, for ρ = 0 and div B = 0,

∂D/∂t + u div D = c curl (H - 1/c Vect. [Du]) (1·2)

∂B/∂t = -c curl (E - 1/c Vect. [uB]) (2·2)

Let us consider a beam travelling along the x-axis, with apparent velocity v
(i.e., velocity with respect to the fixed ether) in medium moving with
velocity ux = u in the same direction.
Then if the electric and magnetic vectors are proportional to eiA(x - vt), we
have

∂/∂x = iA, ∂/∂t = -iAv, ∂/∂y = ∂/∂z = 0, uy = uz = 0

Then ∂D_y/∂t = -c∂Hz/∂x - u∂Dy/∂z ... (1·21)

and ∂Bz/∂t = -c∂Ey/∂x - u∂Bz/∂x (2·21)

Since D = KE and B = μH, we have

iAv(κEy) = -ciA(Hz + uKEy) (1·22)

iAv(μHz) = -ciA(Ey + uμHz) (2·22)

or v(K - u)Ey = cHz (1·23)

μ(v - u)Hz = cEy (2·23)

Multiplying (1·23) by (2·23)

μK(v - u)² = c²

Hence (v - u)² = c²/μk = v₀²

∴ v = v₀ + u,

making Fresnelian convection co-efficient simply unity.
Equations (1·21) and (2·21) may be obtained more simply from physical
considerations.
According to Heaviside and Hertz, the real seat of both electric and
magnetic polarisation is the moving medium itself. Now at a point which is
fixed with respect to the ether, the rate of change of electric polarisation is
δD/δt.
Consider a slab of matter moving with velocity ux along the x-axis, then
even in a stationary field of electrostatic polarisation, that is, for a field in
which δD/δt = 0, there will be some change in the polarisation of the body
due to its motion, given by ux(δD/δx). Hence we must add this term to a
purely temporal rate of change δD/δt. Doing this we immediately arrive at
equations (1·21) and (2·21) for the special case considered there.
Thus the Hertz-Heaviside form of field equations gives unity as the value
for the Fresnelian convection co-efficient. It has been shown in the
historical introduction how this is entirely at variance with the observed
optical facts. As a matter of fact, Larmor has shown (Aether and Matter)
that 1 - 1/μ² is not only sufficient but is also necessary, in order to explain
experiments of the Arago prism type.
A short summary of the electromagnetic experiments bearing on this
question, has already been given in the introduction.
According to Hertz and Heaviside the total polarisation is situated in the
medium itself and is completely carried away by it. Thus the
electromagnetic effect outside a moving medium should be proportional to
K, the specific inductive capacity.
Rowland showed in 1876 that when a charged condenser is rapidly rotated
(the dielectric remaining stationary), the magnetic effect outside is
proportional to K, the Sp. Ind. Cap.
Röntgen (Annalen der Physik 1888, 1890) found that if the dielectric is
rotated while the condenser remains stationary, the effect is proportional to

K - 1.
Eichenwald (Annalen der Physik 1903, 1904) rotated together both
condenser and dielectric and found that the magnetic effect was
proportional to the potential difference and to the angular velocity, but was
completely independent of K. This is of course quite consistent with
Rowland and Röntgen.
Blondlot (Comptes Rendus, 1901) passed a current of air in a steady
magnetic field Hy, (H = Hz = 0). If this current of air moves with velocity ux
along the x-axis, an electromotive force would be set up along the z-axis,
due to the relative motion of matter and magnetic tubes of induction. A pair
of plates at z = ±a, will be charged up with density ρ = Dz = KE = K. us
Hy/c. But Blondlot failed to detect any such effect.
H. A. Wilson (Phil. Trans. Royal Soc. 1904) repeated the experiment with a
cylindrical condenser made of ebony, rotating in a magnetic field parallel to
its own axis. He observed a change proportional to K — 1 and not to K.
Thus the above set of electro-magnetic experiments contradict the Hertz-
Heaviside equations, and these must be abandoned.
[P. C. M.]

Note 2.
Lorentz Transformation.

Lorentz. Versuch einer theorie der elektrischen und optischen
Erscheinungen im bewegten Körpern.
(Leiden—1895).
Lorentz. Theory of Electrons (English edition), pages 197-200, 230, also
notes 73, 86, pages 318, 328.
Lorentz wanted to explain the Michelson-Morley null-effect. In order to do
so, it was obviously necessary to explain the Fitzgerald contraction. Lorentz
worked on the hypothesis that an electron itself undergoes contraction when
moving. He introduced new variables for the moving system defined by the
following set of equations.

x¹ = β(x - ut), y¹ = y, z¹ = z, t¹ = β(t - (u/c²)·x)

and for velocities, used

vx¹ = β²vx + u, vy¹ = βvy, vz¹ = βvz and ρ¹ = ρ/β.

With the help of the above set of equations, which is known as the Lorentz
transformation, he succeeded in showing how the Fitzgerald contraction
results as a consequence of “fortuitous compensation of opposing effects.”
It should be observed that the Lorentz transformation is not identical with
the Einstein transformation. The Einsteinian addition of velocities is quite
different as also the expression for the “relative” density of electricity.
It is true that the Maxwell-Lorentz field equations remain practically
unchanged by the Lorentz transformation, but they are changed to some
slight extent. One marked advantage of the Einstein transformation consists

in the fact that the field equations of a moving system preserve exactly the
same form as those of a stationary system.
It should also be noted that the Fresnelian convection coefficient comes out
in the theory of relativity as a direct consequence of Einstein’s addition of
velocities and is quite independent of any electrical theory of matter.
[P. C. M.]

Note 3.

See Lorentz, Theory of Electrons (English edition), § 181, page 213.
H. Poincare, Sur la dynamique ‘electron, Rendiconti del circolo matematico
di Palermo 21 (1906).
[P. C. M.]

Note 4.
Relativity Theorem and Relativity-Principle.

Lorentz showed that the Maxwell-Lorentz system of electromagnetic field-
equations remained practically unchanged by the Lorentz transformation.
Thus the electromagnetic laws of Maxwell and Lorentz can be definitely
proved “to be independent of the manner in which they are referred to two
coordinate systems which have a uniform translatory motion relative to
each other.” (See “Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies,” page 5.) Thus so
far as the electromagnetic laws are concerned, the principle of relativity can
be proved to be true.
But it is not known whether this principle will remain true in the case of
other physical laws. We can always proceed on the assumption that it does
remain true. Thus it is always possible to construct physical laws in such a
way that they retain their form when referred to moving coordinates. The
ultimate ground for formulating physical laws in this way is merely a
subjective conviction that the principle of relativity is universally true.
There is no a priori logical necessity that it should be so. Hence the
Principle of Relativity (so far as it is applied to phenomena other than
electromagnetic) must be regarded as a postulate, which we have assumed
to be true, but for which we cannot adduce any definite proof, until after the
generalisation is made and its consequences tested in the light of actual
experience.
[P. C. M.]

Note 5.

See “Electrodynamics of Moving Bodies,” p. 5-8.

Note 6.
Field Equations in Minkowski’s Form.

Equations (i) and (ii) become when expanded into Cartesians:—

∂mz/∂y - ∂my/∂z - ∂ex/∂τ = ρνx }
∂mx/∂z - ∂mz/∂x - ∂ey/∂τ = ρνy } ... (1·1)
∂my/∂x - ∂mx/∂y - ∂ez/∂τ = ρνz }

and ∂ex/∂x + ∂ey/∂y + ∂ez/∂z = ρ (2·1)
Substituting x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄ and x, y, z, and iτ; and ρ₁, ρ₂, ρ₃, ρ₄ for ρνx, ρνy,
ρνz, iρ, where i = √(-1).
We get,

∂mz/∂x₂ - ∂my/∂x₃ - i(∂ex/∂x₄) = ρνx{ = ρ₁ }
- ∂mz/∂x₁ + ∂mx/∂x₃ - i(∂ey/∂x₄) = ρνy = ρ₂ } ... (1·2)
∂my/∂x₁ - ∂mx/∂x₂ - i(∂ez/∂x₄) = ρνz{ = ρ₃ }

and multiplying (2·1) by i we get

∂iex/∂x₁ + ∂iey/∂x₂ + ∂iez/∂x₃ = iρ = ρ₄ ... ... (2·2)

Now substitute

mx = f₂₃ = -f₃₂ and iex = f₄₁ = -f₁₄
my = f₃₁ = -f₁₃ iey = f₄₂ = -f₂₄
mz = f₁₂ = -f₂₁ iez = f₄₃ = -f₃₄

and we get finally:—

∂f₁₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₁₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₁₄/∂x₄ = ρ₁ }

∂f₂₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₂₃/∂x₃ + ∂f₂₄/∂x₄ = ρ₂ } ... (3)

∂f₃₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₃₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₃₄/∂x₄ = ρ₃ }

∂f₄₁/∂x₁ + ∂f₄₂/∂x₂ + ∂f₄₃/∂x₃ = ρ₄ }

Note 9.
On the Constancy of the Velocity of Light.

Page 12—refer also to page 6, of Einstein’s paper.
One of the two fundamental Postulates of the Principle of Relativity is that
the velocity of light should remain constant whether the source is moving or
stationary. It follows that even if a radiant source S move with a velocity u,
it should always remain the centre of spherical waves expanding outwards
with velocity c.
At first sight, it may not appear clear why the velocity should remain
constant. Indeed according to the theory of Ritz, the velocity should become
c + u, when the source of light moves towards the observer with the
velocity u.
Prof. de Sitter has given an astronomical argument for deciding between
these two divergent views. Let us suppose there is a double star of which
one is revolving about the common centre of gravity in a circular orbit. Let
the observer be in the plane of the orbit, at a great distance Δ.

The light emitted by the star when at the position A will be received by the
observer after a time, Δ/(c + u) while the light emitted by the star when at
the position B will be received after a time Δ/(c - u). Let T be the real half-
period of the star. Then the observed half-period from B to A is
approximately T - 2Δu/c² and from A to B is T + 2Δu/c². Now if 2uΔ/c² be
comparable to T, then it is impossible that the observations should satisfy
Kepler’s Law. In most of the spectroscopic binary stars, 2uΔ/c² are not only
of the same order as T, but are mostly much larger. For example, if u = 100

km/sec, T = 8 days, Δ/c = 33 years (corresponding to an annual parallax of
·1″), then T - 2uΔ/c² = 0. The existence of the Spectroscopic binaries, and
the fact that they follow Kepler’s Law is therefore a proof that c is not
affected by the motion of the source.
In a later memoir, replying to the criticisms of Freundlich and Günthick that
an apparent eccentricity occurs in the motion proportional to kuΔ₀, u₀ being
the maximum value of u, the velocity of light emitted being

u₀ = c + ku,
k = 0 Lorentz-Einstein
k = 1 Ritz.

Prof. de Sitter admits the validity of the criticisms. But he remarks that an
upper value of k may be calculated from the observations of the double star
β-Aurigae. For this star, the parallax π = ·014″, e = ·005, u₀ = 110 km/sec, T
= 3·96,

Δ > 65 light-years,
k is < ·002.

For an experimental proof, see a paper by C. Majorana. Phil. Mag., Vol. 35,
p. 163.
[M. N. S.]

Note 10.
Rest-density of Electricity.

If ρ is the volume density in a moving system then ρ√(1 - u²) is the
corresponding quantity in the corresponding volume in the fixed system,
that is, in the system at rest, and hence it is termed the rest-density of
electricity.
[P. C. M.]

Note 11
(page 17)
Space-time vectors of the first and the second kind.

As we had already occasion to mention, Sommerfeld has, in two papers on
four dimensional geometry (vide, Annalen der Physik, Bd. 32, p. 749; and
Bd. 33, p. 649), translated the ideas of Minkowski into the language of four
dimensional geometry. Instead of Minkowski’s space-time vector of the
first kind, he uses the more expressive term ‘four-vector,’ thereby making it
quite clear that it represents a directed quantity like a straight line, a force or
a momentum, and has got 4 components, three in the direction of space-
axes, and one in the direction of the time-axis.
The representation of the plane (defined by two straight lines) is much more
difficult. In three dimensions, the plane can be represented by the vector
perpendicular to itself. But that artifice is not available in four dimensions.
For the perpendicular to a plane, we now have not a single line, but an
infinite number of lines constituting a plane. This difficulty has been
overcome by Minkowski in a very elegant manner which will become clear
later on. Meanwhile we offer the following extract from the above
mentioned work of Sommerfeld.
(Pp. 755, Bd. 32, Ann. d. Physik.)
“In order to have a better knowledge about the nature of the six-vector
(which is the same thing as Minkowski’s space-time vector of the 2nd kind)
let us take the special case of a piece of plane, having unit area (contents),
and the form of a parallelogram, bounded by the four-vectors u, v, passing
through the origin. Then the projection of this piece of plane on the xy plane
is given by the projections ux, uy, vx, vy of the four vectors in the
combination

φx y = uxvy - uyv{x}.

Let us form in a similar manner all the six components of this plane φ. Then
six components are not all independent but are connected by the following
relation

φy z φx l + φ z x φy l + φ x y φz l = 0

Further the contents | φ | of the piece of a plane is to be defined as the
square root of the sum of the squares of these six quantities. In fact,

| φ |² = φy z² + φz x² + φx y² + φx l² + φy l² + φz l².

Let us now on the other hand take the case of the unit plane φ* normal to φ;
we can call this plane the Complement of φ. Then we have the following
relations between the components of the two plane:—

φy z* = φx l, φz x* = φy l, φx y* = φz l φz l* = φy x ...

The proof of these assertions is as follows. Let u*, v* be the four vectors
defining φ*. Then we have the following relations:—

ux* ux + uy* uy + uz* uz + ul* ul = 0

ux* vx + uy* vy + uz* vz + ul* vl = 0

vx* ux + vy* uy + vz* uz + vl* ul = 0

v x * v x + v y * v y + v z * v z + v l* v l = 0

If we multiply these equations by vl, ul, vs, and subtract the second from the
first, the fourth from the third we obtain

ux* φx l + uy* φy l + uz* φz l = 0

v x * φz l + v y * φy l + v z * φz l = 0

multiplying these equations by vx* . ux*, or by vy* . uy*, we obtain

φx z* φx l + φy z* φy l = 0 and φx y* φx l + φz x* φz l = 0

from which we have

φy z * : φ x y * : φ z x * = φ x l : φ z l : φ y l

In a corresponding way we have

φy z : φx y : φz x = φx l* : φz l* : φy l*.

i.e. φi k* = λφ(i k)

when the subscript (ik) denotes the component of φ in the plane contained
by the lines other than (ik). Therefore the theorem is proved.

We have (φ φ*) = φy z φy z* + ...

= 2 (φy z φz l + ...)

=0

The general six-vector f is composed from the vectors φ, φ* in the following
way:—

f = ρφ + ρ* φ*,

ρ and ρ* denoting the contents of the pieces of mutually perpendicular
planes composing f. The “conjugate Vector” f* (or it may be called the
complement of f) is obtained by interchanging ρ and ρ*.
We have

f* = ρ*φ + ρφ*

We can verify that

fy z* = fx l etc.

and f² = ρ² + ρ*², (ff*) = 2ρρ*.
| f |² and (ff*) may be said to be invariants of the six vectors, for their values
are independent of the choice of the system of co-ordinates.
[M. N. S.]

Note 12.
Light-velocity as a maximum.

Page 23, and Electro-dynamics of Moving Bodies, p. 17.
Putting v = c - x, and w = c - λ, we get

V = (2c - (x + λ))/(1 + (c - x)(c - λ)/c²) = (2c - (x + λ))/(c² + c² - (x + λ)c +
xλ/c²)

= c (2c - (x + λ))/(2c - (x + λ) + xλ/c)

Thus v lt; c, so long as | xλ | > 0.
Thus the velocity of light is the absolute maximum velocity. We shall now
see the consequences of admitting a velocity W > c.
Let A and B be separated by distance l, and let velocity of a “signal” in the
system S be W > c. Let the (observing) system S′ have velocity +v with
respect to the system S.
Then velocity of signal with respect to system S′ is given by W′ = (W - v)/(1
- Wv/c²)
Thus “time” from A to B as measured in S′, is given by l/W′ = l(1 -
Wv/c²)/(W - v) = t′ (1)
Now if v is less than c, then W being greater than c (by hypothesis) W is
greater than v, i.e., W > v.
Let W = c + μ and v = c - λ.
Then Wv = (c + μ)(c - λ) = c² + (μ + λ)c - μλ.
Now we can always choose v in such a way that Wv is greater than c², since
Wv is > c² if (μ + λ)c - μλ is > 0, that is, if μ + λ > μλ/c; which can always
be satisfied by a suitable choice of λ.

Thus for W > c we can always choose λ in such a way as to make Wv > c²,
i.e., λ - Wv/c² negative. But W - v is always positive. Hence with W > c, we
can always make t′, the time from A to B in equation (1) “negative.” That is,
the signal starting from A will reach B (as observed in system S′) in less
than no time. Thus the effect will be perceived before the cause commences
to act, i.e., the future will precede the past. Which is absurd. Hence we
conclude that W > c is an impossibility, there can be no velocity greater
than that of light.
It is conceptually possible to imagine velocities greater than that of light,
but such velocities cannot occur in reality. Velocities greater than c, will not
produce any effect. Causal effect of any physical type can never travel with
a velocity greater than that of light.
[P. C. M.]

Notes 13 and 14.

We have denoted the four-vector ω by the matrix | ω₁ ω₂ ω₃ ω₄ |. It is then at
once seen that [=ω] denotes the reciprocal matrix

| ω₁ |
| ω₂ |
| ω₃ |
| ω₄ |

It is now evident that while ω¹ = ωA, [=ω]¹ = A⁻¹[=ω]
[ω, s] The vector-product of the four-vector ω and s may be represented by
the combination

[ωs] = [=ω]s - ṡω

It is now easy to verify the formula f¹ = A⁻¹fA. Supposing for the sake of
simplicity that f represents the vector-product of two four-vectors ω, s, we
have

f¹ = [ω¹s¹] = [[=ω]¹s¹ - [=s]1ω1]

= [A⁻¹ [=ω]sA - A⁻¹s[=ω]A]

= A⁻¹[[=ω]s - s[=ω]]A = A⁻¹fA.

Now remembering that generally

f = ρφ + ρ*φ*.

Where ρ, ρ* are scalar quantities, φ, φ* are two mutually perpendicular unit
planes, there is no difficulty in seeming that
1
f = A⁻¹fA.

Note 15.
The vector product (wf). (P. 36).

This represents the vector product of a four-vector and a six-vector. Now as
combinations of this type are of frequent occurrence in this paper, it will be
better to form an idea of their geometrical meaning. The following is taken
from the above mentioned paper of Sommerfeld.
“We can also form a vectorial combination of a four-vector and a six-vector,
giving us a vector of the third type. If the six-vector be of a special type,
i.e., a piece of plane, then this vector of the third type denotes the
parallelopiped formed of this four-vector and the complement of this piece
of plane. In the general case, the product will be the geometric sum of two
parallelopipeds, but it can always be represented by a four-vector of the 1st
type. For two pieces of 3-space volumes can always be added together by
the vectorial addition of their components. So by the addition of two 3-
space volumes, we do not obtain a vector of a more general type, but one
which can always be represented by a four-vector (loc. cit. p. 759). The
state of affairs here is the same as in the ordinary vector calculus, where by
the vector-multiplication of a vector of the first, and a vector of the second
type (i.e., a polar vector), we obtain a vector of the first type (axial vector).
The formal scheme of this multiplication is taken from the three-
dimensional case.
Let A = (Ax, Ay, Az) denote a vector of the first type, B = (By z, Bz x, Bx y)
denote a vector of the second type. From this last, let us form three special
vectors of the first kind, namely—

Bx = (Bx x, Bx y, Bx z) }
By = (By x, By y, By z) } (Bi k = - Bk i, Bi i = 0).
Bz = (Bz x, Bz y, Bz z) }

Since Bj j is zero, Bj is perpendicular to the j-axis. The j-component of the
vector-product of A and B is equivalent to the scalar product of A and Bj,

i.e.,

(A Bj,) = Ax Bj x + Ay Bj y + Az Bj z.

We see easily that this coincides with the usual rule for the vector-product;
e. g., for j = x.

(ABx) = Ay Bx y - Az Bz x.

Correspondingly let us define in the four-dimensional case the product (Pf)
of any four-vector P and the six-vector f. The j-component (j = x, y, z, or l)
is given by

(Pfj) = Pxfj x + Pyfj y + Pwfj z + Pzfj l

Each one of these components is obtained as the scalar product of P, and the
vector fj which is perpendicular to j-axis, and is obtained from f by the rule
fj = [(fj x, fj y, fj z, fj l) fj j = 0.]
We can also find out here the geometrical significance of vectors of the
third type, when f = φ, i.e., f represents only one plane.
We replace φ by the parallelogram defined by the two four-vectors U, V,
and let us pass over to the conjugate plane φ*, which is formed by the
perpendicular four-vectors U*, V*. The components of (Pφ) are then equal to
the 4 three-rowed under-determinants Dx Dy Dz Dl of the matrix

| P x Py Pz Pl |
| |
| U x U y U z U l* |
* * *

| |
| V x V y V z V l* |
* * *

Leaving aside the first column we obtain

Dx = Py(Uz* Vl* - Ul* Vz*) + Pz(Ul* Vy* - Uy* Vl*)
+ Pl(Uy* Vz* - Uz* Vy*)
= Py φz y* + Pz* φl y + Pl φ*y z.
= P y φ x y + P z φ x z + Pl φ x l ,

which coincides with (Pφx) according to our definition.
Examples of this type of vectors will be found on page 36, Φ = wF, the
electrical-rest-force, and ψ = 2wf*, the magnetic-rest-force. The rest-ray Ω =
iw[Φψ]* also belong to the same type (page 39). It is easy to show that

Ω = -i | w₁ w₂ w₃ w₄ |
| Φ₁ Φ₂ Φ₃ Φ₄ |
| ψ₁ ψ₂ ψ₃ ψ₄ |

When (Ω₁, Ω₂, Ω₃) = 0, w₄ = i, Ω reduces to the three-dimensional vector

| Ω₁, Ω₂, Ω₃ | = | Φ₁ Φ₂ Φ₃ |
| |
| ψ₁ ψ₂ ψ₃ |

Since in this case, Φ₁ = w₄ F₁₄ = en (the electric force)
ψ₁ = -iw₄ f₂₃ = mx (the magnetic force)
we have (Ω) = | ex ey ez |
| mx my mz |

[M. N. S.]

Note 16.
The electric-rest force. (Page 37.)

The four-vector φ = wF which is called by Minkowski the electric-rest-
force (elektrische Ruh-Kraft) is very closely connected to Lorentz’s
Ponderomotive force, or the force acting on a moving charge. If ρ is the
density of charge, we have, when ε = 1, μ = 1, i.e., for free space

ρ₀φ₁ = ρ₀[w₁ F₁₁ w₂ F₁₂ + w₃ F₁₃ + w₄ F₁₄]

= ρ₀/(√(1 - V²/c²)) [dx + 1/c (v₂ h₃ - v₃ h₂)]

Now since ρ₀ = ρ√(1 - V²/c²)
We have ρ₀φ₁ = ρ[dx + 1/c (v₂ h₃ - v₃ h₂)]
N. B.—We have put the components of e equivalent to (dx, dy, dz), and the
components of m equivalent to hx hy hz), in accordance with the notation
used in Lorentz’s Theory of Electrons.
We have therefore

ρ₀ (φ₁, φ₂, φ₃) = ρ (d + 1/c [v·h]),

i.e., ρ₀ (φ₁, φ₂, φ₃) represents the force acting on the electron. Compare
Lorentz, Theory of Electrons, page 14.
The fourth component φ₄ when multiplied by ρ₀ represents i-times the rate
at which work is done by the moving electron, for ρ₀ φ₄ = iρ [vxdx + vydy +
vzdz] = vx ρ₀φ₁ + vy ρ₀φ₂ + vz ρ₀φ₃. -√(-1) times the power possessed by the
electron therefore represents the fourth component, or the time component
of the force-four-vector. This component was first introduced by Poincare
in 1906.

The four-vector ψ = iωF* has a similar relation to the force acting on a
moving magnetic pole.
[M. N. S.]

Note 17.
Operator “Lor” (§ 12, p. 41).

The operation | ∂/∂x₁ ∂/∂x₂ ∂/∂x₃ ∂/∂x₄ | which plays in four-dimensional
mechanics a rôle similar to that of the operator (i∂/∂x, + j∂/∂y, + k∂/∂z = ▽)
in three-dimensional geometry has been called by Minkowski ‘Lorentz-
Operation’ or shortly ‘lor’ in honour of H. A. Lorentz, the discoverer of the
theorem of relativity. Later writers have sometimes used the symbol □ to
denote this operation. In the above-mentioned paper (Annalen der Physik,
p. 649, Bd. 38) Sommerfeld has introduced the terms, Div (divergence), Rot
(Rotation), Grad (gradient) as four-dimensional extensions of the
corresponding three-dimensional operations in place of the general symbol
lor. The physical significance of these operations will become clear when
along with Minkowski’s method of treatment we also study the geometrical
method of Sommerfeld. Minkowski begins here with the case of lor S,
where S is a six-vector (space-time vector of the 2nd kind).
This being a complicated case, we take the simpler case of lor s,
where s is a four-vector = | s₁, s₂, s₃, s₄ |

and s = | s₁ |
| s₂ |
| s₃ |
| s₄ |

The following geometrical method is taken from Sommerfeld.
Scalar Divergence—Let ΔΣ denote a small four-dimensional volume of any
shape in the neighbourhood of the space-time point Q, dS denote the three-
dimensional bounding surface of ΔΣ, n be the outer normal to dS. Let S be
any four-vector, Pn its normal component. Then

Div S = Lim ∫ PndS/ΔΣ.
ΔΣ = 0

Now if for ΔΣ we choose the four-dimensional parallelopiped with sides
(dx₁, dx₂, dx₃, dx₄), we have then

Div S = ∂s₁/∂x₁ + ∂s₂/∂x₂ + ∂s₃/∂x₃ + ∂s₄/∂x₄ = lor S.

If f denotes a space-time vector of the second kind, lor f is equivalent to a
space-time vector of the first kind. The geometrical significance can be thus
brought out. We have seen that the operator ‘lor’ behaves in every respect
like a four-vector. The vector-product of a four-vector and a six-vector is
again a four-vector. Therefore it is easy to see that lor S will be a four-
vector. Let us find the component of this four-vector in any direction s. Let
S denote the three-space which passes through the point Q (x₁, x₂, x₃, x₄)
and is perpendicular to s, ΔS a very small part of it in the region of Q, dσ is
an element of its two-dimensional surface. Let the perpendicular to this
surface lying in the space be denoted by n, and let fs n denote the component
of f in the plane of (sn) which is evidently conjugate to the plane dσ. Then
the s-component of the vector divergence of f because the operator lor
multiplies f vectorially.

= Div fs = Lim (∫ fs ndσ)/ΔS.
Δs = 0

Where the integration in dσ is to be extended over the whole surface.
If now s is selected as the x-direction, Δs is then a three-dimensional
parallelopiped with the sides dy, dz, dl, then we have

and generally

Div fj = ∂fj x/∂x + ∂fj y/∂y + ∂fj z/∂z + ∂fj l/∂l (where fj, j = 0).

Hence the four-components of the four-vector lor S or Div. f is a four-vector
with the components given on page 42.
According to the formulae of space geometry, Dx denotes a parallelopiped
laid in the (y-z-l) space, formed out of the vectors (Py Pz Pl), (Uy* Uz* Ul*)
(Vy* Vz* Vl*).
Dx is therefore the projection on the y-z-l space of the parallelopiped formed
out of these three four-vectors (P, U*, V*), and could as well be denoted by
Dyzl. We see directly that the four-vector of the kind represented by (Dx,
Dy, Dz, Dl) is perpendicular to the parallelopiped formed by (P U* V*).
Generally we have

(Pf) = PD + P*D*.

∴ The vector of the third type represented by (Pf) is given by the
geometrical sum of the two four-vectors of the first type PD and P*D*.
[M. N. S.]

Footnotes
1. See Note 1.

2. See Note 2.

3. See Note 4.

4. See Notes 9 and 12.

5. Note A.

6. Vide Note 9.

7. Vide Note 9.

8. Vide Note 12.

9. Vide Note 1.

10. Note 2.

11. Vide Note 3.

12. Vide Note 4.

13. Note 5.

14. See notes on § 8 and 10.

15. See note 9.

16. See Note.

17. Vide Note.

18. Just as beings which are confined within a narrow region surrounding
a point on a spherical surface, may fall into the error that a sphere is a
geometric figure in which one diameter is particularly distinguished
from the rest.

19. Einzelne stelle der Materie.

20. Vide Note.

21. Vide note 13.

22. Vide note 14.

23. Vide note 15.

24. Vide note 16.

25. Vide note 17.

26. Vide note 19.

27. Vide note 18.

28. Vide note 40.

29. Sichel—a German word meaning a crescent or a scythe. The original
term is retained as there is no suitable English equivalent.

30. Planck, Zur Dynamik bewegter systeme, Ann. d. physik, Bd. 26,
1908, p. 1.

31. H. Minkowski; the passage refers to paper (2) of the present edition.

32. Minkowski—Mechanics, appendix, page 65 of paper (2). Planck—
Verh. d. D. P. G. Vol. 4, 1906, p. 136.

33. Schütz, Gött. Nachr. 1897, p. 110.

34. Lienard, L’Eclairage électrique T. 16, 1896, p. 53. Wiechert, Ann. d.
Physik, Vol. 4.

35. K. Schwarzschild. Gött-Nachr. 1903. H. A. Lorentz, Enzyklopädie
der Math. Wissenschaften V. Art 14, p. 199.
Transcriber’s Notes:
The book's idiosyncratic spelling, emphasis, punctuation, and
symbology especially in mathematical formulas, have been retained.
Footnotes have been collected at the end of the text, and are linked
for ease of reference.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PRINCIPLE
OF RELATIVITY ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the

collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with

this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official

version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)